TOSHIBA TMP86FH47ADUG

8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86FH47ADUG
TMP86FH47ADUG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D
TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless,
semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and
vulnerability to physical stress.
It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards
of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction
or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to
property.
In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating
ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications.
Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the “Handling Guide for
Semiconductor Devices,” or “TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook” etc. 021023_A
The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications
(computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic
appliances, etc.).
These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires
extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of
human life or bodily injury (“Unintended Usage”). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control
instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments,
combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended
Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B
The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products
of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations.
060106_Q
The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No
responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third
parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any
patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C
The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and
foreign trade laws. 021023_F
For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3
of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
© 2006 TOSHIBA CORPORATION
All Rights Reserved
Page 2
TMP86FH47ADUG
Difference among product (TMP86xx46 Series)
86C846
86CH46
86CH46A
86CM46
86CM46A
86PH46
86PM46
86PM46A
ROM
8192bytes
(MASK)
16384bytes
(MASK)
32768bytes
(MASK)
16384bytes
(OTP)
32768bytes
(OTP)
RAM
512bytes
512bytes
1024bytes
512bytes
1024bytes
DBR(note1)
16384bytes
(FLASH)
512bytes
512bytes
128bytes
(Flash control register
contained)
33pins
Large current
output
19pins
(LED direct drive)
Interrupt
18interrupt sources
(External : 6 Internal : 12)
Timer counter
16-bit timer counter : 1ch
8-bit timer counter : 2ch
UART
8-bit UART : 1ch
SIO
High-Speed SIO : 1ch
Key-on wakeup
4ch
10-bit AD converter
Analog-input : 8ch
without protect diode
on the VDD side
R
VDD
Terminal for
SERIAL PROM
MODE(note2)
86FH46A
－
I/O
Structure
of TEST pin
86FH46
R
RIN
without pull
down resister
R
RIN
BOOT1/RXD(P10)
BOOT2/TXD(P11)
－
Emulation Chip
TMP86C947XB
Package
P-SDIP42-600-1.78
VDD
VDD
R
without pull
down resister
BOOT/RXD(P02)
TXD(P03)
Note 1: The products with Flash memory (86FH46,86FH46A) contain the Flash control register (FLSCR) at 0FFFH in the DBR
area. The products with mask ROM or OTP and the emulation chip do not have the FLSCR register. In these
devices,therefore, a program that accesses the FLSCR register cannot function properly (executes differently as in the
case of a Flash product).
Note 2: The TXD and RXD pins to be used in Serial PROM mode differ between the 86FH46 and the 86FH46A. Take this into consideration in your board design when you replace the product. Details of the function refer to the chapter of the
86FH46,86FH46A data sheet.
Page 3
TMP86FH47ADUG
Difference among product (TMP86xx47 Series)
86C847
86CH47
86CH47A
86CM47
86CM47A
86PH47
86PM47
86PM47A
ROM
8192bytes
(MASK)
16384bytes
(MASK)
32768bytes
(MASK)
16384bytes
(OTP)
32768bytes
(OTP)
RAM
512bytes
512bytes
1024bytes
512bytes
1024bytes
DBR(note1)
86FH47
86FH47A
16384bytes
(FLASH)
512bytes
512bytes
128bytes
(Flash control register
contained)
－
I/O
35pins
Large current
output
19pins
(LED direct drive)
Interrupt
18interrupt sources
(External : 6 Internal : 12)
Timer counter
16-bit timer counter : 1ch
8-bit timer counter : 2ch
UART
8-bit UART : 1ch
SIO
High-Speed SIO : 1ch
Key-on wakeup
4ch
10-bit AD converter
Analog-input : 8ch
without protect diode
on the VDD side
R
VDD
Structure
of TEST pin
R
RIN
Terminal for
SERIAL PROM
MODE(note2)
R
RIN
without pull
down resister
－
VDD
VDD
R
without pull
down resister
BOOT1/RXD(P10)
BOOT2/TXD(P11)
BOOT/RXD(P02)
TXD(P03)
TMP86C947XB
Emulation Chip
Package
(P-LQFP44-10100.80A)
Available
Available
(86CH47)
Available
N.A.
Available
Available
N.A.
Package
(P-LQFP44-10100.80B)
N.A.
Available
(86CH47A)
N.A.
Available
N.A.
N.A.
Available
Note 1: The products with Flash memory (86FH47,86FH47A) contain the Flash control register (FLSCR) at 0FFFH in the DBR
area. The products with mask ROM or OTP and the emulation chip do not have the FLSCR register. In these
devices,therefore, a program that accesses the FLSCR register cannot function properly (executes differently as in the
case of a Flash product).
Note 2: The TXD and RXD pins to be used in Serial PROM mode differ between the 86FH47 and the 86FH47A. Take this into consideration in your board design when you replace the product. Details of the function refer to the chapter of the
86FH47,86FH47A data sheet.
TMP86FH47ADUG
Differences in Electrical Characteristics (TMP86xx46 Series)
86C846 / 86CH46 / 86CM46
86CM46A
86PM46
86PH46
86CH46A
86FH46
[V]
[V]
[V]
[V]
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Operating condition
(MCU
mode)
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 1.8V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
(b)
(Note1)
1
4.2
8
1.8
16 [MHz]
(a) 2.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
1.8
1
4.2
8
0.030
0.034
4.2
(b)
(Note2)
0.030
0.034
1.8
2.0
1.8
(a)
3.0
2.7
2.7
0.030
0.034
2.7
0.030
0.034
2.7
1
4.5
(a)
(a)
(a)
Read/
Fetch
86FH46A
16 [MHz]
(a) 2.7V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
(b) 1.8V to 2.0V (-20 to 85 ℃ )
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 3.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
(b) 2.7V to 3.0V (-20 to 85 ℃ )
[V]
5.5
(a)
4.5
Erase/
Program
－
－
2.7
－
0.030
0.034
1.8
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40 ℃ )
－
－
[V]
5.5
(a)
4.5
4.5
2.7
2.7
1.8
0.030
0.034
1.8
2
4
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (20 to 30 ℃ )
Operating current
(a)
0.030
0.034
Operating condition
(Serial PROM
mode)
[V]
5.5
2
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40 ℃ )
Operating current varies with each product. For details, refer to the datacheet (electrical chracteristics) of each product.
(Note3)
Note 1: With The 86CH46A,PH46 the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 ℃ to 85 ℃ when the supply voltage VDD is less than
2.0V.
Note 2: With The 86FH46A, the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 ℃ to 85 ℃ when the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0V.
Note 3: With The 86FH46A, when a program is executing in the Flash memory or when data is being read from the Flash memory,
the Flash memory operates in an intermittent manner causing peak currents in the Flash memory momentarily, as shown
in Figure. in this case, the supply current IDD(in NORMAL1,NORMAL2 and SLOW1 mode) is defined as the sum of the
average peak current and MCU current.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs)
Program counter (PC)
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
Momentary Flash current
I DDP-P
[mA]
Max. current Sum of average momentary
Typ. current Flash current and MCU current
MCU current
Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
Page 5
TMP86FH47ADUG
Differences in Electrical Characteristics (TMP86xx47 Series)
86C847 / 86CH47 / 86CM47
86CM47A
86PM47
86PH47
86CH47A
86FH47
[V]
[V]
[V]
[V]
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Operating condition
(MCU
mode)
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 1.8V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
(b)
(Note1)
1
4.2
8
1.8
16 [MHz]
(a) 2.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
1.8
1
4.2
8
0.030
0.034
4.2
(b)
(Note2)
0.030
0.034
1.8
2.0
1.8
(a)
3.0
2.7
2.7
0.030
0.034
2.7
0.030
0.034
2.7
1
4.5
(a)
(a)
(a)
Read/
Fetch
86FH47A
16 [MHz]
(a) 2.7V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
(b) 1.8V to 2.0V (-20 to 85 ℃ )
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 3.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85 ℃ )
(b) 2.7V to 3.0V (-20 to 85 ℃ )
[V]
5.5
(a)
4.5
Erase/
Program
－
－
2.7
－
0.030
0.034
1.8
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40 ℃ )
－
－
[V]
5.5
(a)
4.5
4.5
2.7
2.7
1.8
0.030
0.034
1.8
2
4
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (20 to 30 ℃ )
Operating current
(a)
0.030
0.034
Operating condition
(Serial PROM
mode)
[V]
5.5
2
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40 ℃ )
Operating current varies with each product. For details, refer to the datacheet (electrical chracteristics) of each product.
(Note3)
Note 1: With The 86CH47A, PH47 the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 ℃ to 85 ℃ when the supply voltage VDD is less than
2.0V.
Note 2: With The 86FH47A, the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 ℃ to 85 ℃ when the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0V.
Note 3: With The 86FH47A, when a program is executing in the Flash memory or when data is being read from the Flash memory,
the Flash memory operates in an intermittent manner causing peak currents in the Flash memory momentarily, as shown
in Figure. in this case, the supply current IDD(in NORMAL1,NORMAL2 and SLOW1 mode) is defined as the sum of the
average peak current and MCU current.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs)
Program counter (PC)
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
Momentary Flash current
I DDP-P
[mA]
Max. current Sum of average momentary
Typ. current Flash current and MCU current
MCU current
Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
Revision History
Date
Revision
2006/2/23
1
First Release
2006/3/9
2
Contents Revised
2006/6/29
3
Periodical updating.No change in contents.
2006/10/8
4
Contents Revised
Table of Contents
Difference among product (TMP86xx46 Series)
TMP86FH47ADUG
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
3
4
5
2. Operational Description
2.1
CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 7
Program Memory (Flash) .......................................................................................................................... 7
Data Memory (RAM) ................................................................................................................................. 7
2.2.1
2.2.2
Clock Generator........................................................................................................................................ 8
Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 10
2.2
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
Configuration of timing generator
Machine cycle
2.2.3.1
2.2.3.2
2.2.3.3
Single-clock mode
Dual-clock mode
STOP mode
2.2.4.1
2.2.4.2
2.2.4.3
2.2.4.4
STOP mode
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
SLOW mode
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 11
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 16
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... 29
Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. 30
Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. 30
System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 30
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1
3.2
Interrupt latches (IL15 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.1
3.2.2
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 34
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF15 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 34
3.4.1
3.4.2
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 37
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 38
3.3
3.4
Interrupt Source Selector (INTSEL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
i
3.4.2.2
Using data transfer instructions
3.4.3
Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 40
3.5.1
3.5.2
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 41
Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1
4.2
SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5. Time Base Timer (TBT)
5.1
Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 49
Control .................................................................................................................................................... 49
Function .................................................................................................................................................. 50
5.2.1
5.2.2
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 51
Control .................................................................................................................................................... 51
5.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1
6.2
Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ...................................................................
Watchdog Timer Enable .........................................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)......................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Reset ...........................................................................................................................
54
55
56
56
57
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) ..................................................................................
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP).......................................................................................................
Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................
58
58
58
59
6.3
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7. I/O Ports
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Port P0 (P07 to P00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P3 (P37 to P30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P4 (P47 to P40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
63
64
65
66
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.1
ii
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.2
8.3
TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 70
External Trigger Timer Mode .................................................................................................................. 72
Event Counter Mode ............................................................................................................................... 74
Window Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 75
Pulse Width Measurement Mode............................................................................................................ 76
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode ............................................................................. 79
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1
9.2
9.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.3.8
9.3.9
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ................................................................................................................ 89
8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) ........................................................................................................ 90
8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)..................................................................... 90
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4).................................................................. 93
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) .............................................................................................................. 95
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) ................................................................................................ 96
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4).......................................................... 96
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................... 99
Warm-Up Counter Mode....................................................................................................................... 101
9.3.9.1
9.3.9.2
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
(NORMAL1 → NORMAL2 → SLOW2 → SLOW1)
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
(SLOW1 → SLOW2 → NORMAL2 → NORMAL1)
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.1
10.2
10.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10.3.1
Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 106
10.3.1.1
10.3.1.2
Clock source
Shift edge
10.3.2.1
10.3.2.2
10.3.2.3
Transmit mode
Receive mode
Transmit/receive mode
10.3.3.1
10.3.3.2
10.3.3.3
Transmit mode
Receive mode
Transmit/receive mode
10.3.2
10.3.3
Transfer bit direction ........................................................................................................................... 108
Transfer modes................................................................................................................................... 109
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.1
11.8.2
121
122
124
125
125
126
126
126
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 126
Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 126
iii
11.9
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
11.9.1
11.9.2
11.9.3
11.9.4
11.9.5
11.9.6
Parity Error..........................................................................................................................................
Framing Error......................................................................................................................................
Overrun Error ......................................................................................................................................
Receive Data Buffer Full.....................................................................................................................
Transmit Data Buffer Empty ...............................................................................................................
Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
127
127
127
128
128
129
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
12.1
12.2
12.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 135
Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 135
Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 136
12.6.1
12.6.2
12.6.3
Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 139
Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 139
Noise Countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 139
12.4
12.5
12.6
STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
13. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
13.1
13.2
13.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
14. Flash Memory
14.1
Flash Memory Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
14.1.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR<FLSMD>) ..................................... 144
............................................................................................................................................................ 144
Flash Memory Standby Control (FLSSTB<FSTB>) ............................................................................ 144
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.2.4
14.2.5
14.2.6
Byte Program ......................................................................................................................................
Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase) .............................................................................................................
Chip Erase (All Erase) ........................................................................................................................
Product ID Entry .................................................................................................................................
Product ID Exit ....................................................................................................................................
Read Protect .......................................................................................................................................
14.4.1
Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode............................................................................... 149
14.2
14.3
14.4
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
146
146
147
147
147
147
Toggle Bit (D6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Access to the Flash Memory Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
14.4.1.1
14.4.2
How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the
serial PROM mode)
Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode............................................................................................ 151
14.4.2.1
How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the RAM area (in the MCU mode)
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.1
iv
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
15.2
15.3
Memory Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Serial PROM Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
Serial PROM Mode Control Pins ........................................................................................................
Pin Function........................................................................................................................................
Example Connection for On-Board Writing.........................................................................................
Activating the Serial PROM Mode ......................................................................................................
154
154
155
156
15.6.1
15.6.2
15.6.3
15.6.4
15.6.5
15.6.6
15.6.7
Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H) .................................................................
Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H) ..................................................................
RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H) ................................................................................
Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H) .........................................................
Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H)..............................................................
Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H) ......................................................
Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH) ......................................
161
163
166
168
169
171
172
15.8.1
15.8.2
Calculation Method ............................................................................................................................. 174
Calculation data .................................................................................................................................. 175
15.10.1
15.10.2
15.10.3
Password String................................................................................................................................ 177
Handling of Password Error .............................................................................................................. 177
Password Management during Program Development .................................................................... 177
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
Interface Specifications for UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Checksum (SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
15.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15.10 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15.11
15.12
15.13
15.14
15.15
15.16
Product ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Memory Status Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Erasure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Input Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UART Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
178
180
180
182
183
16. Input/Output Circuitry
16.1
16.2
Control Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.1
17.2
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AD Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.6.1
17.7
17.8
Serial PROM mode ............................................................................................................................. 188
MCU mode (Except Flash Programming or erasing) ......................................................................... 188
MCU mode (Flash Programming or erasing) ..................................................................................... 189
190
192
194
194
Write Characteristics........................................................................................................................... 194
Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
v
18. Package Dimension
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical
specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vi
TMP86FH47ADUG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86FH47ADUG
Product No.
ROM
(FLASH)
RAM
Package
Emulation Chip
TMP86FH47ADUG
16384
bytes
512
bytes
P-LQFP48-0707-0.50D
TMP86C947XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series
- Instruction execution time :
0.25 µs (at 16 MHz)
122 µs (at 32.768 kHz)
- 132 types & 731 basic instructions
2. 18interrupt sources (External : 6 Internal : 12)
3. Input / Output ports (35 pins)
Large current output: 19pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive
4. Prescaler
- Time base timer
- Divider output function
5. Watchdog Timer
6. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch
- Timer, External trigger, Window, Pulse width measurement,
Event counter, Programmable pulse generate (PPG) modes
7. 8-bit timer counter : 2 ch
- Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO),
Pulse width modulation (PWM) output,
Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes
8. High-Speed SIO: 1ch
This product uses the Super Flash technology under the licence of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. Super Flash is registered trademark of Silicon
Storage Technology, Inc.
060116EBP
• The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D
• TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can
malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when
utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations
in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property.
In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most
recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the “Handling Guide for
Semiconductor Devices,” or “TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook” etc. 021023_A
• The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither
intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of
which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury (“Unintended Usage”). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments,
airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's
own risk. 021023_B
• The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or
sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q
• The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by
TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C
• The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E
• For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and
Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86FH47ADUG
9. 8-bit UART : 1 ch
10. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter
- Analog input: 8 ch
11. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch
12. Clock operation
Single clock mode
Dual clock mode
13. Low power consumption operation
STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.)
SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock
stop.)
SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock
oscillate.)
IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts).
IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts).
SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts).
SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock.
interruput.
14. Wide operation voltage:
4.5 V to 5.5 V at 16MHz /32.768 kHz
2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8 MHz /32.768 kHz
Page 2
Release by
RESET
(INT5/STOP) P20
(INT0) P00
(PDO4/PWM4/PPG4/TC4) P01
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
VAREF
AVDD
AVSS
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
NC
VSS
XIN
XOUT
TEST
VDD
(XTIN) P21
(XTOUT) P22
NC
P37 (AIN7/STOP5)
P36 (AIN6/STOP4)
P35 (AIN5/STOP3)
P34 (AIN4/STOP2)
P33 (AIN3)
P32 (AIN2)
P31 (AIN1)
P30 (AIN0)
P10 (PDO3/PWM3/TC3)
P11 (INT1)
P12 (INT2/TC1)
TMP86FH47ADUG
1.2 Pin Assignment
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
Page 3
NC
P13 (DVO)
P14 (PPG)
P15 (INT3)
P16
P17
P07 (INT4)
P06 (SCK)
P05 (SI)
P04 (SO)
P03 (TXD)
P02 (RXD/BOOT)
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86FH47ADUG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86FH47ADUG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
The TMP86FH47ADUG has MCU mode, parallel PROM mode, and serial PROM mode. Table 1-1 shows the pin
functions in MCU mode. The serial PROM mode is explained later in a separate chapter.
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/2)
Pin Name
Pin Number
Input/Output
Functions
18
IO
I
PORT07
External interrupt 4 input
17
IO
IO
PORT06
Serial clock input/output
P05
SI
16
IO
I
PORT05
Serial data input
P04
SO
15
IO
O
PORT04
Serial data output
P03
TXD
14
IO
O
PORT03
UART data output
P02
RXD
BOOT
13
IO
I
I
PORT02
UART data input
Serial PROM mode control input
11
IO
I
O
PORT01
TC4 input
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output
10
IO
I
PORT00
External interrupt 0 input
P17
19
IO
PORT17
P16
20
IO
PORT16
P15
INT3
21
IO
I
PORT15
External interrupt 3 input
22
IO
O
PORT14
PPG output
23
IO
O
PORT13
Divider Output
P12
INT2
TC1
25
IO
I
I
PORT12
External interrupt 2 input
TC1 input
P11
INT1
26
IO
I
PORT11
External interrupt 1 input
27
IO
O
I
PORT10
PDO3/PWM3 output
TC3 input
P22
XTOUT
7
IO
O
PORT22
Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external
clock
P21
XTIN
6
IO
I
PORT21
Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external
clock
9
IO
I
I
PORT20
STOP mode release signal input
External interrupt 5 input
P07
INT4
P06
SCK
P01
TC4
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
P00
INT0
P14
PPG
P13
DVO
P10
PDO3/PWM3
TC3
P20
STOP
INT5
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FH47ADUG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/2)
Pin Name
Pin Number
Input/Output
Functions
P37
AIN7
STOP5
35
IO
I
I
PORT37
Analog Input7
STOP5 input
P36
AIN6
STOP4
34
IO
I
I
PORT36
Analog Input6
STOP4 input
P35
AIN5
STOP3
33
IO
I
I
PORT35
Analog Input5
STOP3 input
P34
AIN4
STOP2
32
IO
I
I
PORT34
Analog Input4
STOP2 input
P33
AIN3
31
IO
I
PORT33
Analog Input3
P32
AIN2
30
IO
I
PORT32
Analog Input2
P31
AIN1
29
IO
I
PORT31
Analog Input1
P30
AIN0
28
IO
I
PORT30
Analog Input0
P47
47
IO
PORT47
P46
46
IO
PORT46
P45
45
IO
PORT45
P44
44
IO
PORT44
P43
43
IO
PORT43
P42
42
IO
PORT42
P41
41
IO
PORT41
P40
40
IO
PORT40
XIN
2
I
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock
XOUT
3
O
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock
RESET
8
IO
Reset signal
TEST
4
I
Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low.
VAREF
37
I
Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion
AVDD
38
I
Analog Power Supply
AVSS
39
I
Analog Power Supply
VDD
5
I
+5V
VSS
1
I
0(GND)
NC
12
I
Non Connection
NC
24
I
Non Connection
NC
36
I
Non Connection
NC
48
I
Non Connection
Page 6
TMP86FH47ADUG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller.
This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86FH47ADUG memory is composed Flash, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special
function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the
memory address map.
0000H
SFR
SFR:
64 bytes
003FH
0040H
512
bytes
RAM
RAM:
TMP86FH47ADUG
Special function register includes:
I/O ports
Peripheral control registers
Peripheral status registers
System control registers
Program status word
Random access memory includes:
Data memory
Stack
023FH
0F80H
DBR:
128
bytes
DBR
Data buffer register includes:
Peripheral control registers
Peripheral status registers
0FFFH
C000H
Flash:
Program memory
16384
bytes
Flash
FFC0H
Vector table for vector call instructions
(32 bytes)
FFDFH
FFE0H
Vector table for interrupts
FFFFH
(32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map
2.1.2
Program Memory (Flash)
The TMP86FH47ADUG has a 16384 bytes (Address C000H to FFFFH) of program memory (Flash ).
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86FH47ADUG has 512bytes (Address 0040H to 023FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes
(0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are
available against such an area.
Page 7
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FH47ADUG
The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory
should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to “00H”. (TMP86FH47ADUG)
SRAMCLR:
LD
HL, 0040H
; Start address setup
LD
A, H
; Initial value (00H) setup
LD
BC, 01FFH
LD
(HL), A
INC
HL
DEC
BC
JRS
F, SRAMCLR
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register
TBTCR
0036H
Clock
generator
XIN
fc
High-frequency
clock oscillator
Timing
generator
XOUT
Standby controller
0038H
XTIN
Low-frequency
clock oscillator
SYSCR1
fs
System clocks
0039H
SYSCR2
System control registers
XTOUT
Clock generator control
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control
2.2.1
Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core
and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the
low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power
operation based on the low-frequency clock.
The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator
between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also
possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 8
TMP86FH47ADUG
Low-frequency clock
High-frequency clock
XIN
XOUT
XIN
XOUT
XTIN
XTOUT
(Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic
resonator
XTIN
XTOUT
(Open)
(c) Crystal
(b) External oscillator
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse
which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program.
The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.2
TMP86FH47ADUG
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware
from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions.
1. Generation of main system clock
2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses
3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer
4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer
5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters
6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator,
and machine cycle counters.
An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2<SYSCK> and
TBTCR<DV7CK>, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler
and the divider are cleared to “0”.
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
Machine cycle counters
SYSCK
DV7CK
High-frequency
clock fc
Low-frequency
clock fs
1 2
fc/4
S
A
Divider
Y
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B
Multiplexer
S
B0
B1
A0 Y0
A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Warm-up
controller
Watchdog
timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 10
TMP86FH47ADUG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR
(0036H)
7
6
(DVOEN)
5
(DVOCK)
DV7CK
4
3
DV7CK
(TBTEN)
Selection of input to the 7th stage
of the divider
2
1
0
(TBTCK)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
0: fc/28 [Hz]
1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to “1”.
Note 2: Do not set “1” on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably.
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider.
Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after
release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock.
The minimum instruction execution unit is called an “machine cycle”. There are a total of 10 different
types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one
machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A
machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle
2.2.3
Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode,
dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and
SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT)
pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In
the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s].
(1)
NORMAL1 mode
In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock.
The TMP86FH47ADUG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FH47ADUG
(2)
IDLE1 mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are
halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock).
IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1
mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF
(Interrupt master enable flag) is “1” (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance
of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When
the IMF is “0” (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the
IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode
In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation.
This mode is enabled by SYSCR2<TGHALT> = "1".
When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the
peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected
with TBTCR<TBTCK>, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits.
When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back
again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR<TBTEN> is set. When IMF =
“1”, EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = “1”, and TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, the INTTBT
interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and
P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the
high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in
SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and
4/fs [s] (122 µs at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes.
The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program.
(1)
NORMAL2 mode
In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate
using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock.
(2)
SLOW2 mode
In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency
clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2<SYSCK> becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2<SYSCK> becomes “0”, the hardware changes
into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2<XEN> becomes “0”, the hardware changes into SLOW1
mode. Do not clear SYSCR2<XTEN> to “0” during SLOW2 mode.
(3)
SLOW1 mode
This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 12
TMP86FH47ADUG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by
SYSCR2<XEN>. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is
stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped.
(4)
IDLE2 mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are
halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or
the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode,
except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode.
(5)
SLEEP1 mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU,
the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode.
In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from
the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped.
(6)
SLEEP2 mode
The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the
SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock.
(7)
SLEEP0 mode
In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode
is enabled by setting “1” on bit SYSCR2<TGHALT>.
When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the
peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected
with TBTCR<TBTCK>, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits.
When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back
again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR<TBTEN> is set. When IMF
= “1”, EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = “1”, and TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, the INTTBT
interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The
internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode.
STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a
inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After
the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP
mode start instruction.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FH47ADUG
IDLE0
mode
RESET
Reset release
Note 2
SYSCR2<TGHALT> = "1"
SYSCR1<STOP> = "1"
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
NORMAL1
mode
Interrupt
STOP pin input
IDLE1
mode
(a) Single-clock mode
SYSCR2<XTEN> = "0"
SYSCR2<XTEN> = "1"
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
IDLE2
mode
NORMAL2
mode
Interrupt
SYSCR1<STOP> = "1"
STOP pin input
SYSCR2<SYSCK> = "0"
SYSCR2<SYSCK> = "1"
STOP
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
SLEEP2
mode
SLOW2
mode
Interrupt
SYSCR2<XEN> = "0"
SYSCR2<XEN> = "1"
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
SLEEP1
mode
Interrupt
(b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR1<STOP> = "1"
SLOW1
mode
STOP pin input
SYSCR2<TGHALT> = "1"
Note 2
SLEEP0
mode
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1
and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP.
Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR<TBTCK> setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator
Operating Mode
High
Frequency
Low
Frequency
RESET
NORMAL1
Single clock
IDLE1
Oscillation
Reset
Operate
Halt
Operate
Halt
Operate with
high frequency
Machine Cycle
Time
4/fc [s]
–
4/fc [s]
Halt
Oscillation
Operate with
low frequency
Oscillation
Halt
Operate
Operate
Operate with
low frequency
SLOW1
4/fs [s]
Stop
SLEEP0
STOP
Reset
Stop
SLEEP2
SLEEP1
Reset
Halt
SLOW2
Dual clock
Other
Peripherals
Stop
NORMAL2
IDLE2
TBT
Operate
IDLE0
STOP
CPU Core
Halt
Stop
Halt
Page 14
Halt
–
TMP86FH47ADUG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1
7
6
5
4
(0038H)
STOP
RELM
RETM
OUTEN
3
2
1
0
WUT
(Initial value: 0000 000*)
STOP
STOP mode start
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active
1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode)
R/W
RELM
Release method for STOP
mode
0: Edge-sensitive release
1: Level-sensitive release
R/W
RETM
Operating mode after STOP
mode
0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode
1: Return to SLOW1 mode
R/W
Port output during STOP mode
0: High impedance
1: Output kept
R/W
OUTEN
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing
STOP mode
Return to NORMAL mode
Return to SLOW mode
000
3 x 216/fc
3 x 213/fs
010
216/fc
213/fs
100
3 x 214/fc
3 x 26/fs
110
*01
214/fc
26/fs
3 x 210/fc
3 x 26/fs
*11
210/fc
26/fs
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to “0” when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to “1” when transiting
from SLOW mode to STOP mode.
Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents.
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don’t care
Note 4: Bits 1 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed.
Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = “0”, input value is fixed to “0”; therefore it may cause external
interrupt request on account of falling edge.
Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1".
Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes
High-Z mode.
Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2
(0039H)
7
6
5
4
XEN
XTEN
SYSCK
IDLE
3
2
1
TGHALT
0
(Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN
High-frequency oscillator control
0: Turn off oscillation
1: Turn on oscillation
XTEN
Low-frequency oscillator control
0: Turn off oscillation
1: Turn on oscillation
SYSCK
Main system clock select
(Write)/main system clock monitor (Read)
0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2)
1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2)
IDLE
CPU and watchdog timer control
(IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes)
0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active
1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes)
TGHALT
TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0
modes)
0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG
1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG.
(Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
R/W
R/W
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to “0”, XEN is cleared to “0” when SYSCK = “0”, or XTEN is cleared
to “0” when SYSCK = “1”.
Note 2: *: Don’t care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don’t care
Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value.
Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to “1” simultaneously.
Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period
of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to “0”.
Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to “0”.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to “1”, be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals
may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
2.2.4.1
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input
(STOP5 to STOP2) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR).
The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is
started by setting SYSCR1<STOP> to “1”. During STOP mode, the following status is maintained.
1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted.
2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the
status in effect before STOP mode was entered.
3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to “0”.
4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7])
which started STOP mode.
STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be
selected with the SYSCR1<RELM>. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP5 to STOP2).
However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release
input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode.
Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external
interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to “1” and interrupts may be accepted immediately
after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before
enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = “1”)
In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP5 to STOP2
pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main
power supply is cut off and long term battery backup.
Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP5
to STOP2 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to
first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP5 to STOP2 input is high. The following two
methods can be used for confirmation.
1. Testing a port.
2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input).
Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
SSTOPH:
LD
(SYSCR1), 01010000B
; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode
TEST
(P2PRD). 0
; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
JRS
F, SSTOPH
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(SYSCR1). 7
; Starts STOP mode
Page 16
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5:
TEST
(P2PRD). 0
; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if
JRS
F, SINT5
LD
(SYSCR1), 01010000B
port P20 is at high
; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode.
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
SINT5:
(SYSCR1). 7
; Starts STOP mode
RETI
VIH
STOP pin
XOUT pin
NORMAL
operation
STOP
operation
Warm up
Confirm by program that the
STOP pin input is low and start
STOP mode.
NORMAL
operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware.
Always released if the STOP
pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted.
Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release
mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = “0”)
In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic
signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In
the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level.
Do not use any STOP5 to STOP2 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
; IMF ← 0
DI
LD
(SYSCR1), 10010000B
; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
VIH
STOP pin
XOUT pin
NORMAL
operation
STOP
operation
Warm up
NORMAL
operation
STOP mode started
by the program.
STOP
operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising
edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FH47ADUG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence.
1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency
clock oscillator is turned on.
2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all
internal operations remain halted. Six different warm-up times can be selected with the
SYSCR1<WUT> in accordance with the resonator characteristics.
3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the
timing generator are cleared to "0".
Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately
performs the normal reset operation.
Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed.
The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode.
The RESET pin input must also be “H” level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this
case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will
increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a
reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level
input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms]
WUT
000
010
100
110
*01
*11
Return to NORMAL Mode
Return to SLOW Mode
12.288
4.096
3.072
1.024
0.192
0.064
750
250
5.85
1.95
5.9
2.0
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up
time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency
when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate
value.
Page 18
Page 19
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
Divider
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Main
system
clock
Oscillator
circuit
STOP pin
input
Divider
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Main
system
clock
Oscillator
circuit
0
Halt
Turn off
Turn on
Turn on
n
Count up
a+3
Warm up
a+2
n+2
n+3
n+4
0
(b) STOP mode release
1
Instruction address a + 2
a+4
2
Instruction address a + 3
a+5
(a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a)
n+1
SET (SYSCR1). 7
a+3
3
Instruction address a + 4
a+6
0
Halt
Turn off
TMP86FH47ADUG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.4.2
TMP86FH47ADUG
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable
interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes.
1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to
operate.
2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the
status in effect before these modes were entered.
3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and
SLEEP1/2 modes by
instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes
Reset input
Reset
No
No
Interrupt request
Yes
“0”
IMF
“1” (Interrupt release mode)
Normal
release mode
Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2
modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 20
TMP86FH47ADUG
• Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes
After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2
and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2<IDLE> to “1”.
• Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode.
These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and
SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2<IDLE> is automatically cleared to “0” and the operation mode
is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin.
After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF = “0”)
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual
interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the
instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt
latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to “0” by load instructions.
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF = “1”)
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual
interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the
program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2
and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2
modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2
modes will not be started.
Page 21
Page 22
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
Halt
Halt
Halt
Halt
Operate
Operate
Operate
Acceptance of interrupt
Instruction address a + 2
a+4
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
㽳㩷Interrupt release mode
a+3
㽲㩷Normal release mode
a+3
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Operate
SET (SYSCR2). 4
a+2
Halt
a+3
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
TMP86FH47ADUG
TMP86FH47ADUG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base
timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT.
2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the
status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered.
3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and
SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals
by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0
modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input
Yes
Reset
No
No
TBT
source clock
falling
edge
Yes
No
TBTCR<TBTEN>
= "1"
Yes
No
TBT interrupt
enable
Yes
(Normal release mode)
No
IMF = "1"
Yes (Interrupt release mode)
Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction
which follows the IDLE0,
SLEEP0 modes start
instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 23
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FH47ADUG
• Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes
Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter.
To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2<TGHALT> to “1”.
• Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode.
These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag
of TBT and TBTCR<TBTEN>.
After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2<TGHALT> is automatically
cleared to “0” and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0
modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR<TBTEN> is set to “1”,
INTTBT interrupt latch is set to “1”.
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin.
After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR<TBTEN> setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF•EF6•TBTCR<TBTEN> = “0”)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the
TBTCR<TBTCK>. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the
instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or
SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR<TBTEN> is set to “1”, INTTBT interrupt latch is set to “1”.
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF•EF6•TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the
TBTCR<TBTCK> and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is
started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be
started.
Page 24
Page 25
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
TBT clock
Halt
Halt
Halt
Watchdog
timer
Main
system
clock
Halt
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
TBT clock
Main
system
clock
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
a+3
Halt
Operate
Operate
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
㽳㩷Interrupt release mode
a+3
㽲㩷Normal release mode
a+3
Acceptance of interrupt
Instruction address a + 2
a+4
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Operate
SET (SYSCR2). 2
a+2
TMP86FH47ADUG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.4.4
TMP86FH47ADUG
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter.
(1)
Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode
First, set SYSCR2<SYSCK> to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for
SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2<XEN> to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from
SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from
SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET
(SYSCR2). 5
; SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
(Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency
clock for SLOW2)
CLR
(SYSCR2). 7
; SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0
(Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET
(SYSCR2). 6
; SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 1
LD
(TC3CR), 43H
; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source)
LD
(TC4CR), 05H
; Sets warming-up counter mode
LDW
(TTREG3), 8000H
; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied)
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRH). 1
; IMF ← 1
EI
SET
; Enables INTTC4
(TC4CR). 3
; Starts TC4, 3
CLR
(TC4CR). 3
; Stops TC4, 3
SET
(SYSCR2). 5
; SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
:
PINTTC4:
(Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock)
CLR
(SYSCR2). 7
; SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0
(Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
RETI
:
VINTTC4:
DW
PINTTC4
; INTTC4 vector table
Page 26
TMP86FH47ADUG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode
First, set SYSCR2<XEN> to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization
(Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC4,TC3), clear SYSCR2<SYSCK> to switch the
main system clock to the high-frequency clock.
SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the
operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to “0”, executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock
for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock
Low-frequency clock
Main system clock
SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET
(SYSCR2). 7
; SYSCR2<XEN> ← 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation)
LD
(TC3CR), 63H
; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source)
LD
(TC4CR), 05H
; Sets warming-up counter mode
LD
(TTREG4), 0F8H
; Sets warm-up time
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRH). 1
; IMF ← 1
EI
SET
; Enables INTTC4
(TC4CR). 3
; Starts TC4, 3
CLR
(TC4CR). 3
; Stops TC4, 3
CLR
(SYSCR2). 5
; SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 0
:
PINTTC4:
(Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock)
RETI
:
VINTTC4:
DW
PINTTC4
; INTTC4 vector table
Page 27
Page 28
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
SET (SYSCR2). 7
SET (SYSCR2). 5
SLOW1 mode
Instruction
execution
XEN
SYSCK
Highfrequency
clock
Lowfrequency
clock
Main
system
clock
NORMAL2
mode
Instruction
execution
XEN
SYSCK
Highfrequency
clock
Lowfrequency
clock
Main
system
clock
(b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Warm up during SLOW2 mode
CLR (SYSCR2). 5
(a) Switching to the SLOW mode
SLOW2 mode
CLR (SYSCR2). 7
NORMAL2
mode
SLOW1 mode
Turn off
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
TMP86FH47ADUG
TMP86FH47ADUG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86FH47ADUG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap
reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and
the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during
the maximum 24/fc[s] (The RESET pin outputs "L" level).
The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5µs at 16.0 MHz) when
power is turned on. RESET pin outputs "L" level during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5µs at 16.0MHz).
Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action.
Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware
Initial Value
Program counter
(PC)
(FFFEH)
Stack pointer
(SP)
Not initialized
General-purpose registers
(W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY)
(JF)
Not initialized
Zero flag
(ZF)
Not initialized
Carry flag
(CF)
Not initialized
Half carry flag
(HF)
Not initialized
Sign flag
(SF)
Not initialized
Overflow flag
(VF)
Not initialized
(IMF)
0
(EF)
0
(IL)
0
Interrupt individual enable flags
Interrupt latches
2.3.1
Initial Value
Prescaler and divider of timing generator
0
Not initialized
Jump status flag
Interrupt master enable flag
On-chip Hardware
Watchdog timer
Enable
Output latches of I/O ports
Refer to I/O port circuitry
Control registers
Refer to each of control
register
RAM
Not initialized
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor.
When the RESET pin is held at “L” level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized.
When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the
vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset
Watchdog timer reset
Malfunction
reset output
circuit
Address trap reset
System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 29
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit
TMP86FH47ADUG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction
from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1<ATAS> is set to “1”), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be
generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5µs at 16.0 MHz). Then, the RESET pin outputs "L" level
during maximum 24/fc[s].
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction
execution
JP a
RESET output
Reset release
Instruction at address r
Address trap is occurred
("L" output)
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
Maximum 24/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 3
Internal reset
signal
Note 1: Address “a” is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1<ATAS> = “1”) space.
Note 2: During reset release, reset vector “r” is read out, and an instruction at address “r” is fetched and decoded.
Note 3: Varies on account of external condition: voltage or capacitance
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset
2.3.3
Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section “Watchdog Timer”.
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the
CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.)
- In case of clearing SYSCR2<XEN> and SYSCR2<XTEN> simultaneously to “0”.
- In case of clearing SYSCR2<XEN> to “0”, when the SYSCR2<SYSCK> is “0”.
- In case of clearing SYSCR2<XTEN> to “0”, when the SYSCR2<SYSCK> is “1”.
The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 µs at 16.0 MHz). Then, the RESET pin outputs "L" level during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5µs at 16.0MHz).
Page 30
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 32
TMP86FH47ADUG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86FH47ADUG has a total of 18 interrupt sources excluding reset, of which 2 source levels are multiplexed. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest
are maskable.
Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors.
The interrupt latch is set to “1” by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable
flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Factors
Internal/External
Enable Condition
Interrupt
Latch
Vector
Address
Priority
(Reset)
Non-maskable
–
FFFE
1
Internal
INTSWI (Software interrupt)
Non-maskable
–
FFFC
2
Internal
INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction
interrupt)
Non-maskable
–
FFFC
2
Internal
INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt)
Non-maskable
IL2
FFFA
2
Internal
INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
Non-maskable
IL3
FFF8
2
External
INT0
IMF• EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1
IL4
FFF6
5
External
INT1
IMF• EF5 = 1
IL5
FFF4
6
Internal
INTTBT
IMF• EF6 = 1
IL6
FFF2
7
Internal
INTTC1
IMF• EF7 = 1
IL7
FFF0
8
External
INT2
IMF• EF8 = 1
IL8
FFEE
9
Internal
INTTC4
IMF• EF9 = 1
IL9
FFEC
10
Internal
INTTC3
IMF• EF10 = 1
IL10
FFEA
11
External
INT3
IMF• EF11 = 1
IL11
FFE8
12
Internal
INTSIO
IMF• EF12 = 1
IL12
FFE6
13
Internal
INTRXD
IMF• EF13 = 1
IL13
FFE4
14
IL14
FFE2
15
IL15
FFE0
16
External
INT4
IMF• EF14 = 1, IL14ER = 0
Internal
INTTXD
IMF• EF14 = 1, IL14ER = 1
External
INT5
IMF• EF15 = 1, IL15ER = 0
Internal
INTADC
IMF• EF15 = 1, IL15ER = 1
Note 1: The INTSEL register is used to select the interrupt source to be enabled for each multiplexed source level (see 3.3 Interrupt Source Selector (INTSEL)).
Note 2: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1<ATOUT> to “0” (It is set for the “reset request” after reset is
cancelled). For details, see “Address Trap”.
Note 3: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1<WDTOUT> to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after
reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer".
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL15 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to “1”, and the CPU is requested to
accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to “0” during reset.
The interrupt latches are located on address 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt
latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modify-write instructions
such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed.
Interrupt latches are not set to “1” by an instruction.
Page 33
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to
"0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL
(Enable interrupt by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on
interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL
should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
; IMF ← 0
DI
LDW
(ILL), 1110100000111111B
; IL12, IL10 to IL6 ← 0
; IMF ← 1
EI
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
WA, (ILL)
; W ← ILH, A ← ILL
TEST
(ILL). 7
; if IL7 = 1 then jump
JR
F, SSET
LD
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable
interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR.
The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These
registers are located on address 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions
(Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt.
While IMF = “0”, all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt
enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to “1”, the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When
an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to “0” after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data,
which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again.
The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction.
The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to “0”.
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF15 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding
bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to “1” enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to “0” disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF15 to EF4) are initialized to “0” and
all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to “1”.
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear
IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF
or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 34
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
; IMF ← 0
DI
LDW
:
(EIRL), 1110100010100000B
; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 ← 1
Note: IMF should not be set.
:
; IMF ← 1
EI
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL;
/* 3AH shows EIRL address */
_DI();
EIRL = 10100000B;
:
_EI();
Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 00000000 000000**)
ILH,ILL
(003DH, 003CH)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
IL15
IL14
IL13
IL12
IL11
IL10
IL9
IL8
IL7
IL6
IL5
IL4
IL3
IL2
ILH (003DH)
IL15 to IL2
1
0
ILL (003CH)
at RD
0: No interrupt request
Interrupt latches
at WR
0: Clears the interrupt request
1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
1: Interrupt request
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3.
Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0"
(Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt
by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 00000000 0000***0)
EIRH,EIRL
(003BH, 003AH)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
EF15
EF14
EF13
EF12
EF11
EF10
EF9
EF8
EF7
EF6
EF5
EF4
EIRH (003BH)
EF15 to EF4
IMF
3
2
1
0
IMF
EIRL (003AH)
Individual-interrupt enable flag
(Specified for each bit)
0:
1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt.
Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt.
Interrupt master enable flag
0:
1:
Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don’t care
Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to “1” at the same time.
Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0"
(Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt
by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 36
TMP86FH47ADUG
3.3 Interrupt Source Selector (INTSEL)
Each interrupt source that shares the interrupt source level with another interrupt source is allowed to enable the
interrupt latch only when it is selected in the INTSEL register. The interrupt controller does not hold interrupt
requests corresponding to interrupt sources that are not selected in the INTSEL register. Therefore, the INTSEL register must be set appropriately before interrupt requests are generated.
The following interrupt sources share their interrupt source level; the source is selected onnthe register INTSEL.
1. INT4 and INTTXD share the interrupt source level whose priority is 15.
2. INT5 and INTADC share the interrupt source level whose priority is 16.
Interrupt source selector
INTSEL
(003EH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
IL14ER
IL15ER
(Initial value: **** **00)
IL14ER
Selects INT4 or INTTXD
0: INT4
1: INTTXD
R/W
IL15ER
Selects INT5 or INTADC
0: INT5
1: INTADC
R/W
3.4 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to
“0” by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 µs @16 MHz) after the
completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return
instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing
chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.4.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to “0” in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt.
b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to “0”.
c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master
enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3.
d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter.
e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Interrupt Sequence
TMP86FH47ADUG
Interrupt service task
1-machine cycle
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
latch (IL)
IMF
Execute
instruction
Execute
instruction
a−1
PC
SP
a
Execute
instruction
Interrupt acceptance
a+1
b
a
b+1 b+2 b + 3
n−1 n−2
n
Execute RETI instruction
c+2
c+1
a
n−2 n−1
n-3
a+1 a+2
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored
Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first
machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt
service program
Vector table address
FFF2H
03H
FFF3H
D2H
Entry address
Vector
D203H
0FH
D204H
06H
Interrupt
service
program
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to “1” even if the maskable interrupt higher than the
level of current servicing interrupt is requested.
In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to “1” in the interrupt service program. In this case,
acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags.
To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced,
before setting IMF to “1”. As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length
between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply
nested.
3.4.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW,
includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are
saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using
the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
Page 38
TMP86FH47ADUG
3.4.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers
can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx:
PUSH
WA
; Save WA register
(interrupt processing)
POP
WA
; Restore WA register
RETI
; RETURN
Address
(Example)
SP
b-5
A
SP
b-4
SP
b-3
PCL
W
PCL
PCH
PCH
PCH
PSW
PSW
PSW
At acceptance of
an interrupt
PCL
At execution of
PUSH instruction
At execution of
POP instruction
b-2
b-1
SP
b
At execution of
RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.4.2.2
Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx:
LD
(GSAVA), A
; Save A register
(interrupt processing)
LD
A, (GSAVA)
; Restore A register
RETI
; RETURN
Page 39
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Interrupt Sequence
TMP86FH47ADUG
Main task
Interrupt
service task
Interrupt
acceptance
Saving
registers
Restoring
registers
Interrupt return
Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing
3.4.3
Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return
1. Program counter (PC) and program status word
(PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack.
2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to
restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and
INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and
PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx:
POP
WA
; Recover SP by 2
LD
WA, Return Address
;
PUSH
WA
; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing)
RETN
; RETURN
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt
(In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx:
INC
SP
; Recover SP by 3
INC
SP
;
INC
SP
;
(interrupt processing)
LD
EIRL, data
; Set IMF to “1” or clear it to “0”
JP
Restart Address
; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Page 40
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example
2).
Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service
task is performed but not the main task.
3.5 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW
is highest prioritized interrupt).
Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.5.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent
memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing
FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is
fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.5.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting
address.
3.6 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is
requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt
(SWI) does.
3.7 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address
trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on
watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
3.8 External Interrupts
The TMP86FH47ADUG has 6 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise).
Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT4. The INT0/P00 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset.
Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P00 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt
control register (EINTCR).
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.8 External Interrupts
Source
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
TMP86FH47ADUG
Pin
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
Enable Conditions
IMF ΠEF4 ΠINT0EN=1
IMF ΠEF5 = 1
IMF ΠEF8 = 1
IMF ΠEF11 = 1
IMF ΠEF14 = 1
and
IL14ER=0
IMF ΠEF15 = 1
and
IL15ER=0
Release Edge (level)
Digital Noise Reject
Falling edge
Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Falling edge
or
Rising edge
Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or
more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW
or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s]
are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or
more are considered to be signals.
Falling edge
or
Rising edge
Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Falling edge
or
Rising edge
Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Falling edge,
Rising edge,
Falling and Rising edge
or
H level
Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Falling edge
Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch.
Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input.
Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such
as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 42
TMP86FH47ADUG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR
7
6
(0037H)
INT1NC
INT0EN
5
4
INT4ES
3
2
1
INT3ES
INT2ES
INT1ES
0
(Initial value: 0000 000*)
INT1NC
Noise reject time select
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise
1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise
R/W
INT0EN
P00/INT0 pin configuration
0: P00 input/output port
1: INT0 pin (Port P00 should be set to an input mode)
R/W
INT4 ES
INT4 edge select
00: Rising edge
01: Falling edge
10: Rising edge and Falling edge
11: H level
R/W
INT3 ES
INT3 edge select
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
R/W
INT2 ES
INT2 edge select
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
R/W
INT1 ES
INT1 edge select
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register
(EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR).
Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc.
Note 4: In case RESET pin is released while the state of INT4 pin keeps "H" level, the external interrupt 4 request is not generated
even if the INT4 edge select is specified as "H" level. The rising edge is needed after RESET pin is released.
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.8 External Interrupts
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 44
TMP86FH47ADUG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86FH47ADUG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are
performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on
address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F80H to 0FFFH.
This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for
TMP86FH47ADUG.
4.1 SFR
Address
Read
Write
0000H
P0DR
0001H
P1DR
0002H
P2DR
0003H
P3DR
0004H
P4DR
0005H
Reserved
0006H
Reserved
0007H
0008H
Reserved
P0PRD
0009H
000AH
Reserved
P2PRD
-
000BH
Reserved
000CH
Reserved
000DH
P1CR
000EH
P3CR
000FH
P4CR
0010H
TC1DRAL
0011H
TC1DRAH
0012H
TC1DRBL
0013H
TC1DRBH
0014H
TC1CR
0015H
Reserved
0016H
TC3CR
0017H
TC4CR
0018H
TTREG3
0019H
TTREG4
001AH
PWREG3
001BH
PWREG4
001CH
ADCCR1
001DH
ADCCR2
001EH
ADCDR2
-
001FH
ADCDR1
-
0020H
UARTSR
UARTCR1
0021H
-
UARTCR2
0022H
RDBUF
TDBUF
0023H
Reserved
0024H
Reserved
0025H
Reserved
Page 45
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR
TMP86FH47ADUG
Address
Read
Write
0026H
SIOCR1
0027H
SIOSR
0028H
SIORDB
SIOTDB
0029H
Reserved
002AH
Reserved
002BH
Reserved
002CH
Reserved
002DH
Reserved
002EH
Reserved
002FH
Reserved
0030H
0031H
Reserved
-
STOPCR
0032H
Reserved
0033H
Reserved
0034H
-
WDTCR1
0035H
-
WDTCR2
0036H
TBTCR
0037H
EINTCR
0038H
SYSCR1
0039H
SYSCR2
003AH
EIRL
003BH
EIRH
003CH
ILL
003DH
ILH
003EH
INTSEL
003FH
PSW
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program.
Note 2: − ; Cannot be accessed.
Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such
as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 46
TMP86FH47ADUG
4.2 DBR
Address
Read
Write
0F80H
Reserved
: :
: :
0F9FH
Reserved
Address
Read
Write
0FA0H
Reserved
: :
: :
0FBFH
Reserved
Address
Read
Write
0FC0H
Reserved
: :
: :
0FDFH
Reserved
Address
Read
Write
0FE0H
Reserved
0FE1H
Reserved
0FE2H
Reserved
0FE3H
Reserved
0FE4H
Reserved
0FE5H
Reserved
0FE6H
Reserved
0FE7H
Reserved
0FE8H
0FE9H
Reserved
-
FLSSTB
0FEAH
SPCR
0FEBH
Reserved
0FECH
Reserved
0FEDH
Reserved
0FEEH
Reserved
0FEFH
Reserved
0FF0H
Reserved
0FF1H
Reserved
0FF2H
Reserved
0FF3H
Reserved
0FF4H
Reserved
0FF5H
Reserved
0FF6H
Reserved
0FF7H
Reserved
0FF8H
Reserved
0FF9H
Reserved
0FFAH
Reserved
0FFBH
Reserved
0FFCH
Reserved
0FFDH
Reserved
0FFEH
Reserved
0FFFH
FLSCR
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program.
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 2: − ; Cannot be accessed.
Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such
as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 48
TMP86FH47ADUG
5. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base
timer interrupt (INTTBT).
5.1 Time Base Timer
5.1.1
Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215
fc/221 or fs/213
fc/216 or fs/28
fc/214 or fs/26
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/212 or fs/24
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
IDLE0, SLEEP0
release request
Falling edge
detector
INTTBT
interrupt request
3
TBTCK
TBTEN
TBTCR
Time base timer control register
Figure 5-1 Time Base Timer configuration
5.1.2
Control
Time Base Timer is controled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR).
Time Base Timer Control Register
7
TBTCR
(0036H)
6
(DVOEN)
TBTEN
5
(DVOCK)
Time Base Timer
enable / disable
4
3
(DV7CK)
TBTEN
2
1
0
TBTCK
(Initial Value: 0000 0000)
0: Disable
1: Enable
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt
Frequency select : [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
Mode
000
fc/223
fs/215
fs/215
001
fc/221
fs/213
fs/213
010
fc/216
fs/28
–
011
fc/2
14
6
–
100
fc/213
fs/25
–
101
fc/2
12
4
–
110
fc/211
fs/23
–
111
9
fs/2
–
fc/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 49
fs/2
fs/2
R/W
5. Time Base Timer (TBT)
5.1 Time Base Timer
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD
(TBTCR) , 00000010B
; TBTCK ← 010
LD
(TBTCR) , 00001010B
; TBTEN ← 1
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRL) . 6
Table 5-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz]
TBTCK
5.1.3
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
000
1.91
1
1
001
7.63
4
4
010
244.14
128
–
011
976.56
512
–
100
1953.13
1024
–
101
3906.25
2048
–
110
7812.5
4096
–
111
31250
16384
–
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider
output of the timing generato which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled.
The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set
interrupt period ( Figure 5-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR<TBTEN>
INTTBT
Interrupt period
Enable TBT
Figure 5-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 50
TMP86FH47ADUG
5.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric
buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
5.2.1
Configuration
Output latch
D
Data output
Q
DVO pin
MPX
A
B
C Y
D
S
2
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/212 or fs/24
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/210 or fs/22
Port output latch
TBTCR<DVOEN>
DVOCK
DVOEN
TBTCR
DVO pin output
Divider output control register
(a) configuration
(b) Timing chart
Figure 5-3 Divider Output
5.2.2
Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register.
Time Base Timer Control Register
7
TBTCR
(0036H)
DVOEN
DVOEN
6
5
DVOCK
4
3
(DV7CK)
(TBTEN)
Divider output
enable / disable
2
1
0
(TBTCK)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
0: Disable
1: Enable
R/W
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
Mode
00
fc/213
fs/25
fs/25
01
fc/212
fs/24
fs/24
10
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
11
fc/210
fs/22
fs/22
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO)
frequency selection: [Hz]
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other
words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not
change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 51
5. Time Base Timer (TBT)
5.2 Divider Output (DVO)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B
; DVOCK ← "00"
LD
(TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOEN ← "1"
Table 5-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz]
DVOCK
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2
Mode
00
1.953 k
1.024 k
1.024 k
01
3.906 k
2.048 k
2.048 k
10
7.813 k
4.096 k
4.096 k
11
15.625 k
8.192 k
8.192 k
Page 52
TMP86FH47ADUG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine.
The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as “reset request” or “interrupt request”. Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to “reset request”.
When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to
effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
23
15
Binary counters
Selector
fc/2 or fs/2
fc/221 or fs/213
fc/219 or fs/211
fc/217 or fs/29
Clock
Clear
R
Overflow
1
WDT output
2
S
2
Q
Interrupt request
Internal reset
Q
S R
WDTEN
WDTT
Writing
disable code
Writing
clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H
WDTCR1
0035H
WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 53
Reset
request
INTWDT
interrupt
request
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
TMP86FH47ADUG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below.
1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter.
2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time.
If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When
WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is set to “1” at this time, the reset request is generated and the RESET pin outputs a
low-level signal, then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is set to “0”, a watchdog
timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated.
The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP
mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH
is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow
time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/
4 of the time set in WDTCR1<WDTT>. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the
time set to WDTCR1<WDTT>.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
Within 3/4 of WDT
detection time
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
LD
(WDTCR1), 00001101B
: WDTT ← 10, WDTOUT ← 1
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and
after changing WDTT).
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
:
:
LD
Within 3/4 of WDT
detection time
:
:
LD
Page 54
TMP86FH47ADUG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1
(0034H)
7
WDTEN
6
5
4
3
(ATAS)
(ATOUT)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
2
1
0
WDTT
WDTOUT
(Initial value: **11 1001)
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.)
1: Enable
NORMAL1/2 mode
WDTT
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer detection time
[s]
Watchdog timer output select
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
mode
00
225/fc
217/fs
217/fs
01
223/fc
215/fs
215fs
10
221fc
213/fs
213fs
11
219/fc
211/fs
211/fs
0: Interrupt request
1: Reset request
Write
only
Write
only
Write
only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to “0”, the program cannot set it to “1”.
Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a
don’t care is read.
Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode.
After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated.
Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in “1.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable”.
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2
(0035H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write
Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code)
B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code)
D2H: Enable assigning address trap area
Others: Invalid
Write
only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1<WDTEN> = 0.
Note 2: *: Don’t care
Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task.
Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1<WDTT>.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1<WDTEN> to “1” enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1<WDTEN> is initialized
to “1” during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 55
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
6.2.3
TMP86FH47ADUG
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller.
1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to “0”.
2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH).
3. Set WDTCR1<WDTEN> to “0”.
4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
: IMF ← 0
DI
LD
(WDTCR2), 04EH
: Clears the binary coutner
LDW
(WDTCR1), 0B101H
: WDTEN ← 0, WDTCR2 ← Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT
6.2.4
NORMAL1/2 mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW
mode
00
2.097
4
4
01
524.288 m
1
1
10
131.072 m
250 m
250 m
11
32.768 m
62.5 m
62.5 m
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is cleared to “0”, a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated
by the binary-counter overflow.
A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt
master flag (IMF).
When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt
is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is
held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the
RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller.
To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1<WDTOUT>.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD
SP, 023FH
: Sets the stack pointer
LD
(WDTCR1), 00001000B
: WDTOUT ← 0
Page 56
TMP86FH47ADUG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is set to “1”, a watchdog timer reset
request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the RESET pin outputs a low-level signal and the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 µs @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate
value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s]
217/fc
Clock
Binary counter
(WDTT=11)
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
Overflow
INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1<WDTOUT>= "0")
Internal reset
A reset occurs
(WDTCR1<WDTOUT>= "1")
WDT reset output
(High-Z)
Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt/Reset
Page 57
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap
TMP86FH47ADUG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address
traps.
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
7
WDTCR1
(0034H)
6
ATAS
ATOUT
5
4
3
ATAS
ATOUT
(WDTEN)
2
1
(WDTT)
0
(WDTOUT)
(Initial value: **11 1001)
Select address trap generation in
the internal RAM area
0: Generate no address trap
1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to “1”, writing the control code
D2H to WDTCR2 is reguired)
Select opertion at address trap
0: Interrupt request
1: Reset request
Write
only
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2
(0035H)
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
6.3.1
6
Write
Watchdog timer control code
and address trap area control
code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code)
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code)
B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code)
Others: Invalid
Write
only
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1<ATAS> specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute
an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1<ATAS> to “0”. To enable the WDTCR1<ATAS> setting, set WDTCR1<ATAS> and then write D2H to WDTCR2.
Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the
setting in WDTCR1<ATAS>.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by
WDTCR1<ATOUT>.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1<ATOUT> is “0”, if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an
attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1<ATAS> is “1”), DBR or the
SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated.
An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF).
When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is
already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending.
Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too
many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller.
To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 58
TMP86FH47ADUG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1<ATOUT> is “1”, if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an
attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1<ATAS> is “1”), DBR or the
SFR area, address trap reset will be generated.
When an address trap reset request is generated, the RESET pin outputs a low-level signal and the internal
hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 µs @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate
value because it has slight errors.
Page 59
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 60
TMP86FH47ADUG
7. I/O Ports
The TMP86FH47ADUG have 5 parallel input/output ports (35 pins) as follows.
Primary Function
Secondary Functions
External interrupt input, Serial PROM mode control input, serial and
timer/counter input/output
Port P0
8-bit I/O port
Port P1
8-bit I/O port
External interrupt input, timer/counter input/output, and divider output
Port P2
3-bit I/O port
Low-frequncy resonator connections, external interrupt input, and
STOP mode release signal input
Port P3
8-bit I/O port
Analog input, and STOP mode release signal input
Port P4
8-bit I/O port
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external
input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several
times before processing. Figure 7-1 shows input/output timing examples.
External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This
timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program.
Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O
port.
! " ! " ! "
%&
! " $
! " ! "
# # %&
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 7-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 61
7. I/O Ports
7.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00)
TMP86FH47ADUG
7.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00)
Port P0 is an 8-bit input/output port which is also used as an external interrupt input, Serial PROM mode control
input, serial interface input/output and timer/counter input/output.
When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, the respective output latch (P0DR) should be set to “1”.
When used as an output port, the respective P0DR bit should be set data. During reset, the output latch is initialized
to “1”.
P0 port output latch (P0DR) and P0 port terminal input (P0PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P0DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P0PRD register should be read. P00 port (INT0) can be configured as either an I/O port or as external interrupt input with
INT0EN (bit 6 in EINTCR). During reset, P00 port (INT0) is configured as an input port.
Figure 7-2 Port P0
P0DR
(0000H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P07
INT4
P06
P05
SI
P04
SO
P03
TXD
P02
RXD
BOOT
P01
P00
PWM4
INT0
SCK
TC4
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
PDO4
PPG4
P0PRD
(0008H)
Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
Page 62
TMP86FH47ADUG
7.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit under software
control. Input/output mode is specified by the corresponding bit in the port P1 input/output control register (P1CR).
Port P1 is configured as an input if its corresponding P1CR bit is cleared to “0”, and as an output if its corresponding
P1CR bit is set to “1”.
During reset, the P1CR is initialized to “0” and port P1 is input mode. The P1 output latches are also initialized to
“0”.
Port P1 is also used as an external interrupt input, a timer/counter input/output, and a divider output. When used as
an input port, an external interrupt input or a timer/counter input, the corresponding bit of P1CR is cleared to “0”.
When used as an output port, a timer/counter output or divider output, the corresponding bit of P1CR is set to “1”
and beforehand the corresponding output latch should be set to “1”. Data can be written into the output latch regardless of P1CR contents, therefore initial output data should be written into the output latch before setting P1CR.
Figure 7-3 Port P1
P1DR
(0001H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
INT3
P14
P13
PPG
DVO
P12
INT2
TC1
P11
INT1
PWM3
P10
TC3
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
PDO3
P1CR
(000DH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR
I/O port for P1 port
(specified for each bit)
0: Input mode
1: Output mode
R/W
Note: Ports set to the input mode read the pin states. Ports set to the output mode read the output latch. When input pin and output pin exist in port P1 together, the contents of the output latch which is specified as an input mode may be rewritten by
executing the bit manipulation instructions.
Page 63
7. I/O Ports
7.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
TMP86FH47ADUG
7.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port.
It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set
to “1”.
During reset, the P2DR is initialized to “1”.
A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports.
It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or
an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse.
P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable.
$ %
! "#"
$ %
$ %
Figure 7-4 Port P2
P2DR
(0002H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P22
XTOUT
P21
XTIN
INT5
P20
STOP
P2PRD
(000AH)
Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P22
P21
P20
Page 64
(Initial value: **** *111)
TMP86FH47ADUG
7.4 Port P3 (P37 to P30)
Port P3 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit under software
control. Port P3 is also used as an analog input, key on wake up input. Input/output mode is specified by the corresponding bit in the port P3 input/output control register (P3CR), and ADCCR1<AINDS>. During reset, P3CR are
initialized to “0” and ADCCR1<AINDS> is set to “1”, therefore port P3 is configured as an input.
When used as an analog input, set an analog input channel to ADCCR1<SAIN> and clear ADCCR1<AINDS> to
“0”. When ADCCR1<AINDS> is “0”, the pin which is specified as an analog input is used as analog input independent on the value of P3CR and P3DR.
When used as an input port or key on wake up input, the corresponding bit of P3CR is cleared to “0” without specifying as an analog input.
When the AD converter is enabled (ADCCR1<AINDS> is “0”), the data of port which is selected as an analog
input is read “0”. and the data of port which is not selected as an analog input is read “0” or “1”, depend on the voltage level.
When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P3CR is set to “1” without specifying as an analog input.
Data can be written into the output latch regardless of P3CR contents, therefore initial output data should be written
into the output latch before setting P3CR.
The pins not used as analog input can be used as an input/output port. But output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to an adjacent port to the analog input
during AD conversion.
STOPj
Key on wake up
Analog input
STOP
OUTEN
AINDS
SAIN
D
P3CRi
Q
Output latch
P3CRi input
Data input (P3DR)
D
Data output (P3DR)
Q
P3i
Note: i = 7 to 0
j = 5 to 2
Output latch
Figure 7-5 Port P3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P3DR
(0003H)
R/W
P37
AIN7
STOP5
P36
AIN6
STOP4
P35
AIN5
STOP3
P34
AIN4
STOP2
P33
AIN3
P32
AIN2
P31
AIN1
P30
AIN0
P3CR
(000EH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P3CR
I/O control
(Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode
1: Output mode
R/W
Note: Ports set to the input mode read the pin states. Ports set to the output mode read the output latch. When input pin and output pin exist in port P3 together, the contents of the output latch which is specified as an input mode may be rewritten by
executing the bit manipulation instructions.
Page 65
7. I/O Ports
7.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40)
TMP86FH47ADUG
7.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40)
Port P4 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit under software
control. Input/output mode is specified by the corresponding bit in the port P4 input/output control register (P4CR).
Port P4 is configured as an input if its corresponding P4CR bit is cleared to “0”, and as an output if its corresponding
P4CR bit is set to “1”.
During reset, the P4CR is initialized to “0” and port P4 is input mode. The P4 output latches are also initialized to
“0”.
When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P4CR is cleared to “0”.
When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P4CR is set to “1”. Data can be written into the output latch
regardless of P4CR contents, therefore initial output data should be written into the output latch before setting P4CR.
Figure 7-6 Port P4
P4DR
(0004H)
R/W
P4CR
(000FH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4CR
I/O control for port P4
(Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode
1: Output mode
R/W
Note: Ports set to the input mode read the pin states. Ports set to the output mode read the output latch. When input pin and output pin exist in port P4 together, the contents of the output latch which is specified as an input mode may be rewritten by
executing the bit manipulation instructions.
Page 66
B
A
TC1㩷㫇㫀㫅
Falling
Decoder
Page 67
B
C
fc/27
fc/23
Figure 8-1 TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
S
ACAP1
TC1CR
Y
Y
S
A
B
Source
clock
Start
Clear
Selector
TC1DRA
CMP
PPG output
mode
16-bit timer register A, B
TC1DRB
16-bit up-counter
MPPG1
INTTC1 interript
S
Match
Q
Enable
Toggle
Set
Clear
Pulse width
measurement
mode
TC1S clear
TFF1
PPG output
mode
Internal
reset
Write to TC1CR
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
Capture
Window mode
TC1 control register
TC1CK
2
A
fc/211, fs/23
Clear
Set Q
Command start
METT1
External
trigger start
D
Edge detector
Rising
External
trigger
TC1S
2
Port
(Note)
Pulse width
measurement
mode
Y
S
MCAP1
Clear
Set
Toggle
Q
Port
(Note)
㪧㪧㪞
pin
TMP86FH47ADUG
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.1 Configuration
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.2 TimerCounter Control
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 1 is controlled by the TimerCounter 1 control register (TC1CR) and two 16-bit timer registers
(TC1DRA and TC1DRB).
Timer Register
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TC1DRA
(0011H, 0010H)
TC1DRAH (0011H)
TC1DRAL (0010H)
(Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111)
Read/Write
TC1DRB
(0013H, 0012H)
TC1DRBH (0013H)
TC1DRBL (0012H)
(Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111)
Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 1 Control Register
TC1CR
(0014H)
TFF1
7
6
TFF1
ACAP1
MCAP1
METT1
MPPG1
5
4
3
TC1S
2
1
TC1CK
0
Read/Write
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
TC1M
Timer F/F1 control
0: Clear
1: Set
ACAP1
Auto capture control
0:Auto-capture disable
1:Auto-capture enable
MCAP1
Pulse width measurement mode control
0:Double edge capture
1:Single edge capture
METT1
External trigger timer
mode control
0:Trigger start
1:Trigger start and stop
MPPG1
PPG output control
0:Continuous pulse generation
1:One-shot
TC1S
TC1 start control
R/W
R/W
Timer
Extrigger
Event
Window
Pulse
00: Stop and counter clear
O
O
O
O
O
O
01: Command start
O
–
–
–
–
O
10: Rising edge start
(Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG)
Rising edge count (Event)
Positive logic count (Window)
–
O
O
O
O
O
11: Falling edge start
(Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG)
Falling edge count (Event)
Negative logic count (Window)
–
O
O
O
O
O
Divider
SLOW,
SLEEP
mode
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC1CK
TC1 source clock select
[Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
00
fc/211
fs/23
DV9
fs/23
01
fc/27
fc/27
DV5
–
10
fc/23
fc/23
DV1
–
11
TC1M
TC1 operating mode
select
PPG
R/W
R/W
External clock (TC1 pin input)
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode
01: Window mode
10: Pulse width measurement mode
11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the
first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC1DRAH and TC1DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower
byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only
the lower byte (TC1DRAL and TC1DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register.
Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC1CR1 during TC1S=00. Set the timer
F/F1 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode.
Page 68
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes.
Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied.
TC1DRA > TC1DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC1DRA > 1 (other modes)
Note 6: Set TFF1 to “0” in the mode except PPG output mode.
Note 7: Set TC1DRB after setting TC1M to the PPG output mode.
Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC1S) is cleared to “00” automatically, and the timer stops. After the
STOP mode is exited, set the TC1S to use the timer counter again.
Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the
execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition.
Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to
"1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for
the first time.
Page 69
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.3 Function
TimerCounter 1 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width
measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer
register 1A (TC1DRA) value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being
cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to “1” captures the up-counter value into the timer register 1B (TC1DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value
in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after
setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock
before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Table 8-1 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 1 (Example: fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC1CK
SLOW, SLEEP mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
Resolution
[µs]
Maximum Time Setting
[s]
Resolution
[µs]
Maximum Time Setting
[s]
Resolution
[µs]
Maximum
Time Setting [s]
00
128
8.39
244.14
16.0
244.14
16.0
01
8.0
0.524
8.0
0.524
–
–
10
0.5
32.77 m
0.5
32.77 m
–
–
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later
(fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR<DV7CK> = “0”)
LDW
; Sets the timer register (1 s ÷ 211/fc = 1E84H)
(TC1DRA), 1E84H
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 7
; Enables INTTC1
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC1CR), 00000000B
; Selects the source clock and mode
LD
(TC1CR), 00010000B
; Starts TC1
LD
(TC1CR), 01010000B
; ACAP1 ← 1
:
:
LD
WA, (TC1DRB)
Example 2 :Auto-capture
; Reads the capture value
Note: Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to "1".
Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first
time.
Page 70
TMP86FH47ADUG
Timer start
Source clock
Counter
0
TC1DRA
?
1
2
3
n−1
4
n
0
1
3
2
4
5
6
n
Match detect
INTTC1 interruput request
Counter clear
(a) Timer mode
Source clock
m−2
Counter
m−1
m
m+1
m+2
n−1
Capture
TC1DRB
?
m−1
m
n
n+1
Capture
m+1
m+2
ACAP1
(b) Auto-capture
Figure 8-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 71
n−1
n
n+1
7
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.3.2
External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1
pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising
or falling edge is defined in TC1CR<TC1S>.
• When TC1CR<METT1> is set to “1” (trigger start and stop)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the
up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated.
If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the up-counter
and the TC1DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request.
Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt.
After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected.
• When TC1CR<METT1> is set to “0” (trigger start)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the
up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated.
The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA.
Since the TC1 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width
of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. The rejection circuit is turned off in the SLOW1/2 or
SLEEP1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycle or more is required.
Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin
(fc =16 MHz)
LDW
; 1ms ÷ 27/fc = 7DH
(TC1DRA), 007DH
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 7
; Enables INTTC1 interrupt
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC1CR), 00000100B
; Selects the source clock and mode
LD
(TC1CR), 00100100B
; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC1 pin
(fc =16 MHz)
LDW
; 4 ms ÷ 27/fc = 1F4H
(TC1DRA), 01F4H
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 7
; Enables INTTC1 interrupt
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC1CR), 00000100B
; Selects the source clock and mode
LD
(TC1CR), 01110100B
; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Page 72
TMP86FH47ADUG
At the rising
edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start
Count start
TC1 pin input
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
TC1DRA
3
n−1 n
4
n
Match detect
1
0
2
3
Count clear
INTTC1
interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT1 = 0)
Count clear
Count start
At the rising
edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Source clock
Up-counter
TC1DRA
0
1
2
m−1 m
3
0
1
2
n
n
3
Match detect
0
Count clear
INTTC1
interrupt request
Note: m < n
(b) Trigger start and stop (METT1 = 1)
Figure 8-3 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 73
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.3.3
Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Either the
rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC1CR<TC1S>.
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated
and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input
pulse to the TC1 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC1DRA is detected at the
edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the
edge opposite to the selected edge.
Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC1 pin.
Setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to “1” captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB with the auto capture function.
Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read
after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting
TC1CR<ACAP1> to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source
clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC1 pin Input
Up-counter
TC1DRA
0
?
1
n−1
2
n
0
1
n
Match detect
INTTC1
interrput request
Counter clear
Figure 8-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 8-2 Input Pulse Width to TC1 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s]
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
High-going
23/fc
23/fs
Low-going
23/fc
23/fs
Page 74
2
At the
rising edge
(TC1S = 10)
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.3.4
Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product
of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count
up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected.
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated
and the up-counter is cleared.
Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC1CR<TC1CK>.
Count start
Count stop
Count start
Timer start
TC1 pin input
Internal clock
Counter
TC1DRA
0
?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
7
Match detect
INTTC1
interrput request
Counter clear
(a) Positive logic (TC1S = 10)
Timer start
Count start
Count stop
Count start
TC1 pin input
Internal clock
0
Counter
TC1DRA
?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 0
1
9
Match detect
INTTC1
interrput request
(b) Negative logic (TC1S = 11)
Figure 8-5 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 75
Counter
clear
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.3.5
Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the
TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is
selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR<TC1S>. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR<MCAP1>.
• When TC1CR<MCAP1> is set to “1” (single-edge capture)
Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse
width, set the rising edge to TC1CR<TC1S>. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the
falling edge to TC1CR<TC1S>.
When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts,
the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt
request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger
edge used to start counting.
• When TC1CR<MCAP1> is set to “0” (double-edge capture)
The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the
cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC1CR<TC1S>. To measure the cycle
starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC1CR<TC1S>.
When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts,
the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt
request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and
generates an INTTC1 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The
up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC1DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don’t care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured
value from TC1DRB.
Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at “1” until detecting the next edge.
Therefore, the second captured value is “1” larger than the captured value immediately after counting
starts.
Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured
value.
Page 76
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz])
CLR
(INTTC1SW). 0
; INTTC1 service switch initial setting
Address set to convert INTTC1SW at each INTTC1
LD
(TC1CR), 00000110B
; Sets the TC1 mode and source clock
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 7
; Enables INTTC1
EI
LD
; IMF= “1”
(TC1CR), 00100110B
; Starts TC1 with an external trigger at MCAP1 = 0
CPL
(INTTC1SW). 0
; INTTC1 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC1 service switch
JRS
F, SINTTC1
LD
A, (TC1DRBL)
LD
W,(TC1DRBH)
LD
(HPULSE), WA
; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM
A, (TC1DRBL)
; Reads TC1DRB (Cycle)
:
PINTTC1:
; Reads TC1DRB (High-level pulse width)
RETI
SINTTC1:
LD
LD
W,(TC1DRBH)
LD
(WIDTH), WA
; Stores cycle in RAM
:
RETI
; Duty calculation
:
VINTTC1:
DW
PINTTC1
; INTTC1 Interrupt vector
WIDTH
HPULSE
TC1 pin
INTTC1 interrupt request
INTTC1SW
Page 77
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
Count start
TC1 pin input
Count start
Trigger
(TC1S = "10")
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
3
4
1
Capture
n
n-1 n 0
TC1DRB
INTTC1
interrupt request
2
3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement
(a) Single-edge capture (MCAP1 = "1")
Count start
Count start
TC1 pin input
(TC1S = "10")
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
3
4
n+1
TC1DRB
n
n+1 n+2 n+3
Capture
n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1
Capture
m
INTTC1
interrupt request
[Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement
(2) Duty measurement
(b) Double-edge capture (MCAP1 = "0")
Figure 8-6 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 78
2
TMP86FH47ADUG
8.3.6
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC1CR<TC1S> specifies either the edge of the input pulse to
the TC1 pin or the command start. TC1CR<MPPG1> specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously
or not (one-shot pulse).
• When TC1CR<MPPG1> is set to “0” (Continuous pulse generation)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the
level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of
the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at
this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation.
When TC1S is cleared to “00” during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before
the counter stops.
• When TC1CR<MPPG1> is set to “1” (One-shot pulse generation)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the
level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of
the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. TC1CR<TC1S> is cleared to
“00” automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same
level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC1CR<TFF1> when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin,
specify TC1CR<TFF1> to “0” to set the high level to the PPG pin, and “1” to set the low level to the PPG pin.
Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to “0”.
Note 1: To change TC1DRA or TC1DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value
of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may
generate a pulse different from that specified.
Note 2: Do not change TC1CR<TFF1> during a run of the timer. TC1CR<TFF1> can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC1CR<TFF1> can not be set correctly from this
point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting
TC1CR<TFF1> specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the
timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1,
change TC1CR<TC1M> to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG
mode. Set TC1CR<TFF1> at this time.
Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied.
TC1DRA > TC1DRB
Note 4: Set TC1DRB after changing the mode of TC1M to the PPG mode.
Page 79
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 µs and low-going for 200 µs
(fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TC1CR), 10000111B
; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock
LDW
(TC1DRA), 007DH
; Sets the cycle (1 ms ÷ 27/fc ms = 007DH)
LDW
(TC1DRB), 0019H
; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 µs ÷ 27/fc = 0019H)
LD
(TC1CR), 10010111B
; Starts the timer
Example :After stopping PPG, setting the PPG pin to a high-level to restart PPG
(fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TC1CR), 10000111B
; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock
LDW
(TC1DRA), 007DH
; Sets the cycle (1 ms ÷ 27/fc µs = 007DH)
LDW
(TC1DRB), 0019H
; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 µs ÷ 27/fc = 0019H)
LD
(TC1CR), 10010111B
; Starts the timer
:
:
LD
(TC1CR), 10000111B
; Stops the timer
LD
(TC1CR), 10000100B
; Sets the timer mode
LD
(TC1CR), 00000111B
; Sets the PPG mode, TFF1 = 0
LD
(TC1CR), 00010111B
; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch
shared with PPG output
Data output
Port output
enable
Q
D
PPG pin
R
Function output
TC1CR<TFF1>
Set
Write to TC1CR
Internal reset
Clear
Match to TC1DRB
Match to TC1DRA
Q
Toggle
Timer F/F1
INTTC1 interrupt request
TC1CR<TC1S> clear
Figure 8-7 PPG Output
Page 80
TMP86FH47ADUG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
2
n
n+1
m 0
1
2
n
n+1
m 0
1
2
Match detect
PPG pin output
INTTC1
interrupt request
Note: m > n
(a) Continuous pulse generation (TC1S = 01)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
1
n
n+1
m
0
PPG pin output
INTTC1
interrupt request
[Application] One-shot pulse output
(b) One-shot pulse generation (TC1S = 10)
Figure 8-8 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 81
Note: m > n
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 82
TMP86FH47ADUG
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23
7
fc/2
5
fc/2
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC4 pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Y
A
B
INTTC4
interrupt request
Clear
Y
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
S
PDO, PPG mode
A
B
S
16-bit
mode
S
TC4M
TC4S
TFF4
Toggle
Q
Set
Clear
Y
16-bit mode
Timer, Event
Counter mode
S
TC4CK
PDO4/PWM4/
PPG4 pin
Timer F/F4
A
Y
TC4CR
B
TTREG4
PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
PDO, PWM,
PPG mode
TFF4
16-bit
mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27
5
fc/2
3
fc/2
fs
fc/2
fc
TC3 pin
Y
8-bit up-counter
Overflow
16-bit mode
PDO mode
16-bit mode
Timer,
Event Couter mode
S
TC3M
TC3S
TFF3
INTTC3
interrupt request
Clear
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Toggle
Q
Set
Clear
PDO3/PWM3/
pin
Timer F/F3
TC3CK
TC3CR
PWM mode
TTREG3
PWREG3
DecodeEN
TFF3
Figure 9-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 3, 4
Page 83
PDO, PWM mode
16-bit mode
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers
(TTREG3, PWREG3).
TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3
(0018H)
R/W
7
PWREG3
(001AH)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running.
Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while
the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR
(0016H)
TFF3
7
TFF3
6
5
4
TC3CK
Time F/F3 control
3
2
TC3S
0:
1:
1
0
TC3M
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Clear
Set
R/W
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC3CK
Operating clock selection [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
mode
000
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
001
fc/27
fc/27
–
010
fc/25
fc/25
–
011
fc/23
fc/23
–
100
fs
fs
fs
101
fc/2
fc/2
–
110
fc
fc
fc (Note 8)
111
TC3S
TC3 start control
0:
1:
000:
001:
TC3M
TC3M operating mode select
010:
011:
1**:
R/W
TC3 pin input
Operation stop and counter clear
Operation start
R/W
8-bit timer/event counter mode
8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode
8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
16-bit mode
(Each mode is selectable with TC4M.)
Reserved
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz]
Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running.
Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 → 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 → 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed.
Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR<TC4M>, where TC3M must
be fixed to 011.
Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control
and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR<TC4S> and TC4CR<TFF4>, respectively.
Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table
9-1 and Table 9-2.
Page 84
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93.
Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 85
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers
(TTREG4 and PWREG4).
TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4
(0019H)
R/W
7
PWREG4
(001BH)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running.
Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while
the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR
(0017H)
TFF4
7
TFF4
6
5
4
TC4CK
Timer F/F4 control
3
2
TC4S
0:
1:
1
0
TC4M
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Clear
Set
R/W
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC4CK
Operating clock selection [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
mode
000
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
001
fc/27
fc/27
–
010
fc/25
fc/25
–
011
fc/2
3
3
–
100
fs
fs
fs
101
fc/2
fc/2
–
110
fc
fc
–
111
TC4S
TC4 start control
0:
1:
000:
001:
010:
TC4M
TC4M operating mode select
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
fc/2
R/W
TC4 pin input
Operation stop and counter clear
Operation start
R/W
8-bit timer/event counter mode
8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode
8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
Reserved
16-bit timer/event counter mode
Warm-up counter mode
16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
16-bit PPG mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running.
Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 → 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings.
To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 → 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed.
Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC4 overflow signal regardless of the
TC3CK setting.
Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR<TC3 M>
must be set to 011.
Page 86
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR<TC3CK>. Set the timer start
control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively.
Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table
9-1 and Table 9-2.
Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93.
Table 9-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode
fc/211
or
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC3
pin input
TC4
pin input
fs/23
8-bit timer
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
Ο
8-bit PDO
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit PWM
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
16-bit timer
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
16-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Warm-up counter
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
–
–
16-bit PWM
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
16-bit PPG
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on
lower bit (TC3CK).
Note 2: Ο : Available source clock
Table 9-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode
fc/211
or
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC3
pin input
TC4
pin input
fs/23
8-bit timer
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
Ο
8-bit PDO
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit PWM
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
–
–
16-bit timer
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
16-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Warm-up counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
16-bit PWM
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
Ο
–
16-bit PPG
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on
lower bit (TC3CK).
Note2: Ο : Available source clock
Page 87
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
Table 9-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode
Register Value
8-bit timer/event counter
1≤ (TTREGn) ≤255
8-bit PDO
1≤ (TTREGn) ≤255
8-bit PWM
2≤ (PWREGn) ≤254
16-bit timer/event counter
1≤ (TTREG4, 3) ≤65535
Warm-up counter
256≤ (TTREG4, 3) ≤65535
16-bit PWM
2≤ (PWREG4, 3) ≤65534
16-bit PPG
and
(PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3)
1≤ (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) ≤65535
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 88
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter,
16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
9.3.1
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter
and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is
cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses.
Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the
shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately
after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation
may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
32.6 ms
62.3 ms
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
2.0 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
510 µs
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
127.5 µs
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 µs later
(TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
(TTREG4), 0AH
: Sets the timer register (80 µs÷27/fc = 0AH).
(EIRH). 1
: Enables INTTC4 interrupt.
LD
(TC4CR), 00010000B
: Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 00011000B
: Starts TC4.
LD
DI
SET
EI
Page 89
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
TC4CR<TC4S>
Internal
Source Clock
1
Counter
TTREG4
?
2
3
n-1
n 0
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
0
n
Match detect
Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Counter clear
Match detect
Figure 9-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
9.3.2
8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin.
When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and
the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input
pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin.
Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24
Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output
pulses.
Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is
not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in
effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an
expected operation may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR<TC4S>
TC4 pin input
0
Counter
TTREG4
?
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
0
n
Match detect
INTTC4 interrupt request
Counter
clear
Match detect
Counter
clear
Figure 9-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
9.3.3
8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin.
In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter
and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and
the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the
timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by
TCjCR<TFFj>. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0.
To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 90
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TTREG4), 3DH
: 1/1024÷27/fc÷2 = 3DH
LD
(TC4CR), 00010001B
: Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 00011001B
: Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running.
Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new
value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed
while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR<TFFj> after the timer is stopped. Do not change the
TCjCR<TFFj> setting upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 91
Page 92
?
INTTC4 interrupt request
PDO4 pin
Timer F/F4
TTREG4
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
0
n
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
2
3
Set F/F
Held at the level when the timer
is stopped
0
Write of "1"
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Figure 9-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.3.4
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The
up-counter counts up using the internal clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the
timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the
timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The
INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR<TFFj>, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.)
Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be
changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the
INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output,
the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the
reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated.
For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is
generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse
different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR<TFFj> after the timer is stopped. Do not change the
TCjCR<TFFj> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level.
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP
mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 9-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
32.8 ms
62.5 ms
fc/2
7
–
8 µs
–
2.05 ms
–
fc/2
5
–
2 µs
–
512 µs
–
fc/2
7
fc/2
5
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
128 µs
–
fs
fs
fs
30.5 µs
30.5 µs
7.81 ms
7.81 ms
fc/2
fc/2
–
125 ns
–
32 µs
–
fc
fc
–
62.5 ns
–
16 µs
–
Page 93
Page 94
?
Shift registar
0
Shift
INTTC4 interrupt request
PWM4 pin
Timer F/F4
?
PWREG4
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
n
n
n
Match detect
1
n
n+1
Shift
FF
0
n
n
n+1
m
One cycle period
Write to PWREG4
Match detect
1
Shift
FF
0
m
m
m+1
p
Write to PWREG4
Match detect
m
1
Shift
FF
0
p
p
Match detect
1
p
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Figure 9-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.3.5
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the
timer is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared.
After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the upper byte and lower byte in this order in
the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse.
Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the
shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately
after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected
operation may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock
Resolution
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
128 µs
244.14 µs
8.39 s
16 s
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
524.3 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
131.1 ms
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
32.8 ms
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later
(fc = 16.0 MHz)
(TTREG3), 927CH
: Sets the timer register (300 ms÷27/fc = 927CH).
(EIRH). 1
: Enables INTTC4 interrupt.
LD
(TC3CR), 13H
:Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode
(lower byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 04H
: Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 0CH
: Starts the timer.
LDW
DI
SET
EI
TC4CR<TC4S>
Internal
source clock
0
Counter
TTREG3
(Lower byte)
TTREG4
(Upper byte)
?
?
INTTC4 interrupt request
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
n
m
Match
detect
Counter
clear
Match
detect
Counter
clear
Figure 9-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 95
2
0
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
9.3.6
TMP86FH47ADUG
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3
and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after
the timer is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is
cleared.
After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin.
Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin.
Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 in
the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this
order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses.
Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in
the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation
may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
9.3.7
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The
TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator.
The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the
logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The
logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the
counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time.
Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or
SLEEP1/2 mode.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR<TFF4>, positive and negative pulses can be
generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.)
Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to
PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of
the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is
stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte
(PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG3) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower
or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.)
If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is
read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of
PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated.
For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt
request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and
the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of
pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR<TFF4> after the timer is stopped. Do not program
TC4CR<TFF4> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing thePWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 96
TMP86FH47ADUG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level.
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4
pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 9-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
8.39 s
16 s
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
524.3 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
131.1 ms
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500ns
–
32.8 ms
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fs
fs
fs
30.5 µs
30.5 µs
fc/2
fc/2
–
125 ns
–
8.2 ms
–
fc
fc
–
62.5 ns
–
4.1 ms
–
2
s
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports
LDW
(PWREG3), 07D0H
: Sets the pulse width.
LD
(TC3CR), 33H
: Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output
mode (lower byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 056H
: Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal
generation mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 05EH
: Starts the timer.
Page 97
2s
Page 98
?
?
PWREG4
(Upper byte)
16-bit
shift register
0
a
Shift
INTTC4 interrupt request
PWM4 pin
Timer F/F4
?
PWREG3
(Lower byte)
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
an
n
an
Match detect
1
an
an+1
Shift
FFFF
0
an
an
an+1
m
b
One cycle period
Write to PWREG4
Write to PWREG3
Match detect
1
Shift
FFFF
0
bm
bm bm+1
p
c
Write to PWREG4
Write to PWREG3
Match detect
bm
1
Shift
FFFF
0
cp
Match detect
cp
1
cp
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Figure 9-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.3.8
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode.
The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and
the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is
switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is
switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3,
TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time.
Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fc/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or
SLEEP1/2 mode.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR<TFF4>, positive and negative pulses can be
generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.)
Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 → TTREG4,
PWREG3 → PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports
LDW
(PWREG3), 07D0H
: Sets the pulse width.
LDW
(TTREG3), 8002H
: Sets the cycle period.
LD
(TC3CR), 33H
: Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode
(lower byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 057H
: Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit
PPG mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 05FH
: Starts the timer.
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since
PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi.
Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not
be obtained.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR<TFF4> after the timer is stopped. Do not change
TC4CR<TFF4> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer
CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level
Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 99
Page 100
?
TTREG4
(Upper byte)
INTTC4 interrupt request
PPG4 pin
Timer F/F4
?
?
TTREG3
(Lower byte)
PWREG4
(Upper byte)
n
PWREG3
(Lower byte)
?
0
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
m
r
q
mn
Match detect
1
mn mn+1
Match detect
qr-1 qr 0
mn
Match detect
1
mn mn+1
Match detect
qr-1 qr 0
mn
Match detect
1
F/F clear
0
Held at the level when the timer
stops
mn mn+1
Write of "0"
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FH47ADUG
Figure 9-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC40)
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.3.9
Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is
switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a
16-bit TimerCouter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to
low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR<TFFi> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output
pulses.
Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match
detection and lower 8 bits are not used.
Note 3: i = 3, 4
9.3.9.1
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
(NORMAL1 → NORMAL2 → SLOW2 → SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability
is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2<XTEN> to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer
is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt
request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2<SYSCK> to 1 to
switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2<XTEN> to
0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 9-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Maximum Time Setting
(TTREG4, 3 = 0100H)
Maximum Time Setting
(TTREG4, 3 = FF00H)
7.81 ms
1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET
(SYSCR2).6
: SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 1
LD
(TC3CR), 43H
: Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 05H
: Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode.
LD
(TTREG3), 8000H
: Sets the warm-up time.
(The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.)
: IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRH). 1
: IMF ← 1
EI
SET
:
PINTTC4:
: Enables the INTTC4.
(TC4CR).3
: Starts TC4 and 3.
:
CLR
(TC4CR).3
: Stops TC4 and 3.
SET
(SYSCR2).5
: SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
(Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.)
CLR
(SYSCR2).7
: SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.)
RETI
:
VINTTC4:
DW
:
PINTTC4
: INTTC4 vector table
Page 101
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
9.3.9.2
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
(SLOW1 → SLOW2 → NORMAL2 → NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2<XEN> to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer
is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt
request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2<SYSCK> to 0 to
switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2<XTEN> to 0 to
stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 9-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H)
Maximum time (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H)
16 µs
4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET
(SYSCR2).7
: SYSCR2<XEN> ← 1
LD
(TC3CR), 63H
: Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 05H
: Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode.
LD
(TTREG3), 0F800H
: Sets the warm-up time.
(The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.)
: IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRH). 1
: Enables the INTTC4.
(TC4CR).3
: Starts the TC4 and 3.
: IMF ← 1
EI
SET
:
PINTTC4:
:
CLR
(TC4CR).3
: Stops the TC4 and 3.
CLR
(SYSCR2).5
: SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 0
(Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.)
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
: SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 0
(Stops the low-frequency clock.)
RETI
VINTTC4:
:
:
DW
PINTTC4
: INTTC4 vector table
Page 102
TMP86FH47ADUG
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
The serial interfaces connect to an external device via SI, SO, and SCK pins.
When these pins are used as serial interface, the output latches for each port should be set to "1".
10.1 Configuration
Internal data bus
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOTDB
Shift register on transmitter
Shift clock
Port
(Note)
Control circuit
SO pin
(Serial data output)
MSB/LSB
selection
Port
(Note)
Shift register on receiver
SI pin
(Serial data input)
SIORDB
To BUS
Port
(Note)
INTSIO
interrupt
SCK pin
(Serial data output)
Internal clock
input
Note: Set the register of port correctly for the port assigned as serial interface pins.
For details, see the description of the input/output port control register.
Figure 10-1 Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
Page 103
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.2 Control
TMP86FH47ADUG
10.2 Control
The SIO is controlled using the serial interface control register (SIOCR1). The operating status of the serial interface can be inspected by reading the status register (SIOCR1).
Serial Interface Control Register
SIOCR1
(0026H)
7
6
SIOS
SIOINH
SIOS
SIOINH
SIOM
SIODIR
5
4
SIOM
3
2
SIODIR
1
0
SCK
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Specify start/stop of transfer
0: Stop
1: Start
Forcibly stops transfer (Note 1)
0: –
1: Forcibly stop (Automatically cleared to "0" after stopping)
Selects transfer mode
00: Transmit mode
01: Receive mode
10: Transmit/receive mode
11: Reserved
Selects direction of transfer
0: MSB (Transfer beginning with bit7)
1: LSB (Transfer beginning with bit0)
NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 modes
SCK
Selects serial clock
SLOW/SLEEP
mode
TBTCR
<DV7CK> = "0"
TBTCR
<DV7CK> = "1"
000
fc/212
fs/24
fs/24
001
fc/28
fc/28
Reserved
010
fc/27
fc/27
Reserved
011
fc/26
fc/26
Reserved
100
fc/25
fc/25
Reserved
101
fc/24
fc/24
Reserved
110
fc/23
fc/23
Reserved
111
R/W
External clock (Input from SCK pin)
Note 1: When SIOCR1<SIOINH> is set to “1”, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Note 2: Transfer mode, direction of transfer and serial clock must be select during the transfer is stopping (when SIOSR<SIOF>
"0").
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Page 104
TMP86FH47ADUG
Serial Interface Status Register
SIOSR
(0027H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
SIOF
SEF
TXF
RXF
TXERR
RXERR
1
0
(Initial value: 0010 00**)
SIOF
Serial transfer operation status
monitor
0: Transfer finished
1: Transfer in progress
SEF
Number of clocks monitor
0: 8 clocks
1: 1 to 7 clocks
TXF
Transmit buffer empty flag
0: Data exists in transmit buffer
1: No data exists in transmit buffer
RXF
Receive buffer full flag
0: No data exists in receive buffer
1: Data exists in receive buffer
Transfer operation error flag
Read
0: – (No error exist)
1: Transmit buffer under run occurs in an external clock mode
Write
0: Clear the flag
1: – (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
Receive operation error flag
Read
0: – (No error exist)
1: Receive buffer over run occurs in an external clock mode
Write
0: Clear the flag
1: – (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
TXERR
RXERR
Read
only
R/W
Note 1: The operation error flag (TXERR and RXERR) are not automatically cleared by stopping transfer with SIOCR1<SIOS>
"0". Therefore, set these bits to "0" for clearing these error flag. Or set SIOCR1<SIOINH> to "1".
Note 2: *: Don't care
Receive buffer register
SIORDB
(0028H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Transmit buffer register
SIOTDB
(0028H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write only
(Initial value: **** ****)
Note 1: SIOTDB is write only register. A bit manipulation should not be performed on the transmit buffer register using a readmodify-write instruction.
Note 2: The SIOTDB should be written after checking SIOSR<TXF> "1". When SIOSR<TXF> is "0", the writing data can't be
transferred to SIOTDB even if write instruction is executed to SIOTDB
Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 105
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
10.3 Function
10.3.1 Serial clock
10.3.1.1 Clock source
The serial clock can be selected by using SIOCR1<SCK>. When the serial clock is changed, the writing
instruction to SIOCR1<SCK> should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIOSR<SIOF>
“0”)
(1)
Internal clock
Setting the SIOCR1<SCK> to other than “111B” outputs the clock (shown in " Table 10-1 Serial
Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz) ") as serial clock outputs from SCK pin. At the before
beginning or finishing of a transfer, SCK pin is kept in high level.
When writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode) data can not follow the serial
clock rate, an automatic-wait function is executed to stop the serial clock automatically and hold the
next shift operation until reading or writing is completed (shown in " Figure 10-2 Automatic-wait
Function (Example of transmit mode) "). The maximum time from releasing the automatic-wait
function by reading or writing a data is 1 cycle of the selected serial clock until the serial clock comes
out from SCK pin.
SIOCR1<SIOS>
Automatically wait
SCK pin output
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
SIOTDB
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
A0
A
B
Automatic wait is released by writing SIOTDB
Figure 10-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode)
Table 10-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
TBTCR<DV7CK> = "0"
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
TBTCR<DV7CK> = "1"
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
2048 bps
fs/24
2048 bps
fc/28
62.5 kbps
Reserved
–
125 kbps
fc/27
125 kbps
Reserved
–
fc/26
250 kbps
fc/26
250 kbps
Reserved
–
100
fc/25
500 kbps
fc/25
500 kbps
Reserved
–
101
fc/24
1.00 Mbps
fc/24
1.00 Mbps
Reserved
–
110
fc/23
2.00 Mbps
fc/23
2.00 Mbps
Reserved
SCK
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
000
fc/212
3.906 kbps
fs/24
001
fc/28
62.5 kbps
010
fc/27
011
Page 106
TMP86FH47ADUG
(2)
External clock
When an external clock is selected by setting SIOCR1<SCK> to “111B”, the clock via the SCK pin
from an external source is used as the serial clock.
To ensure shift operation, the serial clock pulse width must be 4/fc or more for both “H” and “L”
levels.
SCK pin
tSCKL
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4/fc
Figure 10-3 External Clock
10.3.1.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit data, and the trailing edge is used to receive data.
(1)
Leading edge shift
Data is shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK pin input/output).
(2)
Trailing edge shift
Data is shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK pin input/output).
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SCK pin
Shift register
01234567
*0123456
**012345
***01234
****0123
*****012
******01
*******0
********
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit1
Bit0
Shift out
SO pin
Bit7
(a) Leading edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SCK pin
SI pin
Shift register
Bit7
********
Bit6
7*******
Bit5
67******
Bit4
567*****
Bit3
4567****
Bit2
34567***
234567**
(b) Trailing edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
Figure 10-4 Shift Edge
Page 107
1234567*
01234567
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
10.3.2 Transfer bit direction
Transfer data direction can be selected by using SIOCR1<SIODIR>. The transfer data direction can't be set
individually for transmit and receive operations.
When the data direction is changed, the writing instruction to SIOCR1<SIODIR> should be executed while
the transfer is stopped (when SIOCR1<SIOF>= “0”)
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SCK pin
SIOTDB
A
Shift out
SO pin
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A4
A5
A6
A7
(a) MSB transfer
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SCK pin
SIOTDB
A
Shift out
SO pin
A0
A1
A2
A3
(b) LSB transfer
Figure 10-5 Transfer Bit Direction (Example of transmit mode)
10.3.2.1 Transmit mode
(1)
MSB transmit mode
MSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIOCR1<SIODIR> to “0”, in which case the data is
transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
(2)
LSB transmit mode
LSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIOCR1<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the data is
transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
10.3.2.2 Receive mode
(1)
MSB receive mode
MSB receive mode is selected by setting SIOCR1<SIODIR> to “0”, in which case the data is
received sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
Page 108
TMP86FH47ADUG
(2)
LSB receive mode
LSB receive mode is selected by setting SIOCR1<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the data is
received sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
10.3.2.3 Transmit/receive mode
(1)
MSB transmit/receive mode
MSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIOCR1<SIODIR> to “0” in which case the
data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7) and the data is received
sequentially beginning with the most significant (Bit7).
(2)
LSB transmit/receive mode
LSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIOCR1<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the
data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0) and the data is received
sequentially beginning with the least significant (Bit0).
10.3.3 Transfer modes
Transmit, receive and transmit/receive mode are selected by using SIOCR1<SIOM>.
10.3.3.1 Transmit mode
Transmit mode is selected by writing “00B” to SIOCR1<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the transmit operation
Transmit mode is selected by setting “00B” to SIOCR1<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected by using
SIOCR1<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIOCR1<SIODIR>.
When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIOTDB), SIOSR<TXF> is cleared
to “0”.
After SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIOSR<SIOF> is set synchronously to “1” the falling edge of
SCK pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO pin with the direction of the bit specified by
SIOCR1<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK pin's falling edge.
SIOSR<SEF> is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
SIOSR<TXF> is set to “1” at the rising edge of pin after the data written to the SIOTDB is transferred to shift register, then the INTSIO interrupt request is generated, synchronizing with the next
falling edge on SCK pin.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to "1", transfer mode does not start without writing a transmit data to the transmit buffer register (SIOTDB).
Note 2: In internal clock operation, when the SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to "1", SIOTDB is transferred to shift
register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from SCK
pin.
Note 3: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK pin after SIOCR1<SIOS> is
set to "1", SIOTDB is transferred to shift register immediately.
Page 109
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
(2)
During the transmit operation
When data is written to SIOTDB, SIOSR<TXF> is cleared to “0”.
In internal clock operation, in case a next transmit data is not written to SIOTDB, the serial clock
stops to “H” level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the SIOTDB has been
transmitted. Automatic-wait function is released by writing a transmit data to SIOTDB. Then, transmit operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock.
When the next data is written to the SIOTDB before termination of previous 8-bit data with
SIOSR<TXF> “1”, the next data is continuously transferred after transmission of previous data.
In external clock operation, after SIOSR<TXF> is set to “1”, the transmit data must be written to
SIOTDB before the shift operation of the next data begins.
If the transmit data is not written to SIOTDB, transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. Then, INTSIO interrupt request is generated after SIOSR<TXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the transmit operation
There are two ways for stopping transmits operation.
• The way of clearing SIOCR1<SIOS>.
When SIOCR1<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, transmit operation is stopped after all transfer of the
data is finished. When transmit operation is finished, SIOSR<SIOF> is cleared to “0” and
SO pin is kept in high level.
In external clock operation, SIOCR1<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIOSR<SEF> is
set to “1” by beginning next transfer.
• The way of setting SIOCR1<SIOINH>.
Transmit operation is stopped immediately after SIOCR1<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In this
case, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin outout
Automatic wait
SO pin
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIOSR<TXF>
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIOTDB
A
C
B
Writing transmit
data C
Writing transmit Writing transmit
data A
data B
Figure 10-6 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
Page 110
TMP86FH47ADUG
Writing transmit data
Clearing SIOS
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIOSR<TXF>
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIOTDB <SIOS>
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Writing transmit
data C
Figure 10-7 Exaple of External Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
SCK pin
SIOSR<SIOF>
SO pin
tSODH
4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 10-8 Hold Time of the End of Transmit Mode
(4)
Transmit error processing
Transmit errors occur on the following situation.
• Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIOTDB in external clock operation.
If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIOSR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after starting shift operation. Synchronizing with the next serial clock falling edge,
INTSIO interrupt request is generated.
If shift operation starts before writing data to SIOTDB after SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to “1”,
SIOSR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after shift operation is started and then INTSIO
interrupt request is generated.
SIO pin is kept in high level when SIOSR<TXERR> is set to “1”. When transmit error
occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIOCR1<SIOINH> to “1”. In
this case, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Page 111
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIOSR<TXF>
SIOSR<TXERR>
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIOTDB
SIOCR1
<SIOINH>
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
Unknown
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 10-9 Example of Transmit Error Processingme
10.3.3.2 Receive mode
The receive mode is selected by writing “01B” to SIOCR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the receive operation
Receive mode is selected by setting “01” to SIOCR1<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected by using
SIOCR1<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIOCR1<SIODIR>.
After SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIOSR<SIOF> is set synchronously to “1” the falling edge of
SCK pin.
Synchronizing with the SCK pin's rising edge, the data is received sequentially from SI pin with the
direction of the bit specified by SBIDIR<SIODIR>.
SIOSR<SEF> is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
When 8-bit data is received, the data is transferred to SIORDB from shift register. INTSIO interrupt request is generated and SIOSR<RXF> is set to “1”
Note: In internal clock operation, when the SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to "1", the serial clock is generated
from SCK pin after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency.
(2)
During the receive operation
The SIOSR<RXF> is cleared to “0” by reading a data from SIORDB.
In the internal clock operation, the serial clock stops to “H” level by an automatic-wait function
when the all of the 8-bit data has been received. Automatic-wait function is released by reading a
received data from SIORDB. Then, receive operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial
clock.
In external clock operation, after SIOSR<RXF> is set to “1”, the received data must be read from
SIORDB, before the next data shift-in operation is finished.
Page 112
TMP86FH47ADUG
If received data is not read out from SIORDB receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. Then INTSIO interrupt request is generated after SIOSR<RXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the receive operation
There are two ways for stopping the receive operation.
• The way of clearing SIOCR1<SIOS>.
When SIOCR1<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, receive operation is stopped after all of the data is
finished to receive. When receive operation is finished, SIOSR<SIOF> is cleared to “0”.
In external clock operation, SIOCR1<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIOSR<SEF> is
set to “1” by starting the next shift operation.
• The way of setting SIOCR1<SIOINH>.
Receive operation is stopped immediately after SIOCR1<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In this case,
SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin
SI pin
Automatic wait
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIOSR<RXF>
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIORDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 10-10 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Receive Mode
Page 113
C
Writing transmit
data C
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
Reading received data
Clearing SIOS
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin
SI pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIOSR<RXF>
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIORDB
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
C
Writing transmit
data B
Writing transmit
data C
Figure 10-11 Example of External Clock and MSB Receive Mode
(4)
Receive error processing
Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIORDB and the shift register contents,
the received data is ignored while the SIOSR<RXERR> is “1”.
• Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIORDB at SIOSR<RXF>
is “1” in an external clock operation.
If receive error occurs, set the SIOCR1<SIOS> to “0” for reading the data that received
immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIORDB. Data in shift register
(at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIORDB again.
When SIOSR<RXERR> is cleared to “0” after reading the received data, SIOSR<RXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After clearing SIOCR1<SIOS> to “0”, when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK pin, receive
operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIOSR<SIOF> is cleared
to “0”.
If the receive error occurs, set the SIOCR1<SIOINH> to “1” for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and
SIOTDB register are initialized.
Page 114
TMP86FH47ADUG
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin
SI pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIOSR<RXF>
SIOSR<RXERR>
Write a "0" after reading the
received data when a receive
error occurs.
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIORDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 10-12 Example of Receive Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
10.3.3.3 Transmit/receive mode
The transmit/receive mode are selected by writing “10” to SIOCR1<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the transmit/receive operation
Transmit/receive mode is selected by writing “10B” to SIOCR1<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected
by using SIOCR1<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIOCR1<SIODIR>.
When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIOTDB), SIOSR<TXF> is cleared
to “0”.
After SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIOSR<SIOF> is set synchronously to the falling edge of SCK
pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO pin with the direction of the bit specified by
SIOCR1<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK pin's falling edge. And receiving operation also
starts with the direction of the bit specified by SIOCR1<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK pin's
rising edge.
SIOSR<SEF> is kept in high level between the first clock falling edge of SCK pin and eighth clock
falling edge.
SIOSR<TXF> is set to “1” at the rising edge of SCK pin after the data written to the SIOTDB is
transferred to shift register. When 8-bit data has been received, the received data is transferred to
SIORDB from shift register, then the INTSIO interrupt request occurs, synchronizing with setting
SIOSR<RXF> to “1”.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when the SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to "1", SIOTDB is transferred to shift
register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from SCK
pin.
Note 2: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK pin after SIOCR1<SIOS> is
set to "1", SIOTDB is transferred to shift register immediately. When the rising edge is input from
SCK pin, receive operation also starts.
Page 115
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
(2)
During the transmit/receive operation
When data is written to SIOTDB, SIOSR<TXF> is cleared to “0” and when a data is read from
SIORDB, SIOSR<RXF> is cleared to “0”.
In internal clock operation, in case of the condition described below, the serial clock stops to “H”
level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the data has been transmitted.
• Next transmit data is not written to SIOTDB after reading a received data from SIORDB.
• Received data is not read from SIORDB after writing a next transmit data to SIOTDB.
• Neither SIOTDB nor SIORDB is accessed after transmission.
The automatic wait function is released by writing the next transmit data to SIOTDB after reading
the received data from SIORDB, or reading the received data from SIORDB after writing the next
data to SIOTDB.
Then, transmit/receive operation is restarted after maximum 1 cycle of serial clock.
In external clock operation, reading the received data from SIORDB and writing the next data to
SIOTDB must be finished before the shift operation of the next data begins.
If the transmit data is not written to SIOTDB after SIOSR<TXF> is set to “1”, transmit error occurs
immediately after shift operation is started. When the transmit error occurred, SIOSR<TXERR> is
set to “1”.
If received data is not read out from SIORDB before next shift operation starts after setting
SIOSR<RXF> to “1”, receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. When the
receive error has occurred, SIOSR<RXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the transmit/receive operation
There are two ways for stopping the transmit/receive operation.
• The way of clearing SIOCR1<SIOS>.
When SIOCR1<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, transmit/receive operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit/receive operation is finished, SIOSR<SIOF> is
cleared to “0” and SO pin is kept in high level.
In external clock operation, SIOCR1<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIOSR<SEF> is
set to “1” by beginning next transfer.
• The way of setting SIOCR1<SIOINH>.
Transmit/receive operation is stopped immediately after SIOCR1<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In
this case, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Page 116
TMP86FH47ADUG
Clearing SIOS
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin output
Automatic wait
Automatic wait
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SI pin
INTSIO
interrupt
request
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
D0
E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
E0
F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIOSR<TXF>
SIOTDB
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
C
Writing transmit
data C
Writing transmit
data B
SIOSR<RXF>
SIORDB
D
Reading received
data D
F
E
Reading received
data E
Reading received
data F
Figure 10-13 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 117
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
Reading received data
Writing transmit data
Clearing SIOS
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin output
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SI pin
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIOSR<TXF>
SIOTDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Writing transmit
data C
SIOSR<RXF>
SIORDB
D
E
F
Reading received
data D
Reading received
data E
Reading received
data F
Figure 10-14 Example of External Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
(4)
Transmit/receive error processing
Transmit/receive errors occur on the following situation. Corrective action is different, which
errors occur transmits or receives.
(a) Transmit errors
Transmit errors occur on the following situation.
• Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIOTDB in external clock operation.
If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIOSR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO interrupt request is generated after all
of the 8-bit data has been received.
If shift operation starts before writing data to SIOTDB after SIOCR1<SIOS> is set to
“1”, SIOSR<TXERR> is set immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received.
SO pin is kept in high level when SIOSR<TXERR> is set to “1”. When transmit error
occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIOCR1<SIOINH> to “1”
after the received data is read from SIORDB. In this case, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Page 118
TMP86FH47ADUG
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin output
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SI pin
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
INTSIO
interrupt
request
SIOSR<TXF>
SIOSR<TXERR>
SIOTDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Unknown
Writing transmit
data B
SIOSR<RXF>
SIORDB
D
Reading received
data D
E
Reading received
data E
F
Reading received
data F
SIOCR1<SIOINH>
Figure 10-15 Example of Transmit/Receive (Transmit) Error Processing
(b) Receive errors
Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIORDB and the shift register
contents, the received data is ignored while the SIOSR<RXERR> is “1”.
• Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIORDB at
SIOSR<RXF> is “1” in an external clock operation.
If receive error occurs, set the SIOCR1<SIOS> to “0” for reading the data that received
immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIORDB. Data in shift register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIORDB again.
When SIOSR<RXERR> is cleared to “0” after reading the received data, SIOSR<RXF>
is cleared to “0”.
After clearing SIOCR1<SIOS> to “0”, when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIOSR<SIOF>
is cleared to “0”.
If the received error occurs, set the SIOCR1<SIOINH> to “1” for stopping the receive
operation immediately. In this case, SIOCR1<SIOS>, SIOSR register, SIORDB register
and SIOTDB register are initialized.
Page 119
10. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
10.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
SIOCR1<SIOS>
SIOSR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIOSR<SEF>
SCK pin output
SO pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3
SI pin
INTSIO
interrupt
request
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIOSR<TXF>
SIOTDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Unknown
Writing transmit
data C
SIOSR<RXF>
SIOSR<RXERR>
SIORDB
D
E
Reading received
data D
OOH
Reading received
data E
SIOCR1<SIOINH>
Figure 10-16 Example of Transmit/Receive (Receive) Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error
occurs.
SCK pin
SIOSR<SIOF>
SO pin
tSODH
4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 10-17 Hold Time of the End of Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 120
TMP86FH47ADUG
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
Transmit data buffer
UARTCR1
TDBUF
3
Receive data buffer
RDBUF
2
INTTXD
Receive control circuit
Transmit control circuit
2
Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit
Stop bit
Noise rejection
circuit
RXD
TXD
INTRXD
Transmit/receive clock
Y
M
P
X
S
fc/13
fc/26
fc/52
fc/104
fc/208
fc/416
INTTC3
fc/96
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
6
fc/2
fc/27
8
fc/2
S
2
Y
4
2
Counter
UARTSR
UARTCR2
UART status register
UART control register 2
MPX: Multiplexer
Baud rate generator
Figure 11-1 UART (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 121
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.2 Control
TMP86FH47ADUG
11.2 Control
UART is controlled by the UART Control Registers (UARTCR1, UARTCR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UARTSR).
UART Control Register1
UARTCR1
(0020H)
7
6
5
4
3
TXE
RXE
STBT
EVEN
PE
2
1
0
BRG
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE
Transfer operation
0:
1:
Disable
Enable
RXE
Receive operation
0:
1:
Disable
Enable
STBT
Transmit stop bit length
0:
1:
1 bit
2 bits
EVEN
Even-numbered parity
0:
1:
Odd-numbered parity
Even-numbered parity
Parity addition
0:
1:
No parity
Parity
PE
BRG
000:
001:
010:
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
Transmit clock select
Write
only
fc/13 [Hz]
fc/26
fc/52
fc/104
fc/208
fc/416
TC3 ( Input INTTC3)
fc/96
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to “0”, the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive
complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is
enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted.
Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive.
Note 3: UARTCR1<RXE> and UARTCR1<TXE> should be set to “0” before UARTCR1<BRG> is changed.
UART Control Register2
UARTCR2
(0021H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDNC
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise
rejectio time
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
00:
01:
10:
11:
0:
1:
STOPBR
(Initial value: **** *000)
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input)
Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise
Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise
Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise
Write
only
1 bit
2 bits
Note: When UARTCR2<RXDNC> = “01”, pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UARTCR2<RXDNC>
= “10”, longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UARTCR2<RXDNC> = “11”, longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 122
TMP86FH47ADUG
UART Status Register
UARTSR
(0020H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PERR
FERR
OERR
RBFL
TEND
TBEP
0
(Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR
Parity error flag
0:
1:
No parity error
Parity error
FERR
Framing error flag
0:
1:
No framing error
Framing error
OERR
Overrun error flag
0:
1:
No overrun error
Overrun error
RBFL
Receive data buffer full flag
0:
1:
Receive data buffer empty
Receive data buffer full
TEND
Transmit end flag
0:
1:
On transmitting
Transmit end
TBEP
Transmit data buffer empty flag
0:
1:
Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished)
Transmit data buffer empty
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART Receive Data Buffer
RDBUF
(0022H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART Transmit Data Buffer
TDBUF
(0022H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 123
Read
only
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.3 Transfer Data Format
TMP86FH47ADUG
11.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UARTCR1<STBT>), and
parity (Select parity in UARTCR1<PE>; even- or odd-numbered parity by UARTCR1<EVEN>) are added to the
transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
0
Frame Length
8
1
2
3
9
10
0
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
1
Start
Bit 0
1
0
Start
1
1
Start
11
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
12
Stop 2
Figure 11-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 11-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 11-3 sequence except
for the initial setting.
Page 124
TMP86FH47ADUG
11.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART is set of UARTCR1<BRG>. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows.
Table 11-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock
BRG
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
000
76800 [baud]
38400 [baud]
19200 [baud]
001
38400
19200
9600
010
19200
9600
4800
011
9600
4800
2400
100
4800
2400
1200
101
2400
1200
600
When TC3 is used as the UART transfer rate (when UARTCR1<BRG> = “110”), the transfer clock and transfer
rate are determined as follows:
Transfer clock [Hz] = TC3 source clock [Hz] / TTREG3 setting value
Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
11.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UARTCR1<BRG> until a start bit is
detected in RXD pin input. RT clock starts detecting “L” level of the RXD pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start
bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock
interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority
rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD pin
Start bit
RT0
1
2
3
Bit 0
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
RT clock
Start bit
Internal receive data
Bit 0
(a) Without noise rejection circuit
RXD pin
Start bit
RT0
1
2
3
Bit 0
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
1
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit
Bit 0
(b) With noise rejection circuit
Figure 11-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 125
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.6 STOP Bit Length
TMP86FH47ADUG
11.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UARTCR1<STBT>.
11.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UARTCR1<PE> and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UARTCR1<EVEN>.
11.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
11.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UARTCR1<TXE> to “1”. Read UARTSR to check UARTSR<TBEP> = “1”, then write data in TDBUF
(Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TDBUF zero-clears UARTSR<TBEP>, transfers the data to the transmit
shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit,
stop bits whose number is specified in UARTCR1<STBT> and a parity bit if parity addition is specified.
Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1<BRG>. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty
flag UARTSR<TBEP> is set to “1” and an INTTXD interrupt is generated.
While UARTCR1<TXE> = “0” and from when “1” is written to UARTCR1<TXE> to when send data are
written to TDBUF, the TXD pin is fixed at high level.
When transmitting data, first read UARTSR, then write data in TDBUF. Otherwise, UARTSR<TBEP> is not
zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
11.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UARTCR1<RXE> to “1”. When data are received via the RXD pin, the receive data are transferred to
RDBUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity
bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to
RDBUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UARTSR<RBFL> is set and an INTRXD
interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1<BRG>.
If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RDBUF (Receive
data buffer) but discarded; data in the RDBUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UARTCR1<RXE> bit to “0”, the setting becomes valid when
data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting
may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 126
TMP86FH47ADUG
11.9 Status Flag
11.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag
UARTSR<PERR> is set to “1”. The UARTSR<PERR> is cleared to “0” when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Shift register
Parity
Stop
pxxxx0*
xxxx0**
1pxxxx0
UARTSR<PERR>
After reading UARTSR then
RDBUF clears PERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-5 Generation of Parity Error
11.9.2 Framing Error
When “0” is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UARTSR<FERR> is set to “1”.
The UARTSR<FERR> is cleared to “0” when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Shift register
Stop
Final bit
xxxx0*
xxx0**
0xxxx0
After reading UARTSR then
RDBUF clears FERR.
UARTSR<FERR>
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-6 Generation of Framing Error
11.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RDBUF, overrun error flag
UARTSR<OERR> is set to “1”. In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RDBUF are not affected.
The UARTSR<OERR> is cleared to “0” when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
Page 127
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.9 Status Flag
TMP86FH47ADUG
UARTSR<RBFL>
RXD pin
Stop
Final bit
Shift register
xxx0**
RDBUF
yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UARTSR<OERR>
After reading UARTSR then
RDBUF clears OERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UARTSR<OERR> is cleared.
11.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RDBUF sets receive data buffer full flag UARTSR<RBFL> to "1". The
UARTSR<RBFL> is cleared to “0” when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Stop
Final bit
Shift register
xxx0**
RDBUF
yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UARTSR then
RDBUF clears RBFL.
UARTSR<RBFL>
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UARTSR<OERR> is set during the period between reading the UARTSR and reading
the RDBUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RDBUF. Therefore, after reading the RDBUF, read the
UARTSR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains
set.
11.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TDBUF, UARTSR<TBEP> is set to “1”, that is, when data in TDBUF
are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag
UARTSR<TBEP> is set to “1”. The UARTSR<TBEP> is cleared to “0” when the TDBUF is written after
reading the UARTSR.
Page 128
TMP86FH47ADUG
Data write
TDBUF
xxxx
*****1
Shift register
TXD pin
Data write
zzzz
yyyy
1xxxx0
*1xxxx
****1x
*****1
Start
Bit 0
Final bit
Stop
1yyyy0
UARTSR<TBEP>
After reading UARTSR writing TDBUF
clears TBEP.
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 11-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty
11.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TDBUF (UARTSR<TBEP> = “1”), transmit end flag
UARTSR<TEND> is set to “1”. The UARTSR<TEND> is cleared to “0” when the data transmit is stated after
writing the TDBUF.
Shift register
TXD pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
Stop
Start
*1yyyy
Bit 0
Data write for TDBUF
UARTSR<TBEP>
UARTSR<TEND>
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 11-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 129
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.9 Status Flag
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 130
TMP86FH47ADUG
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86FH47ADUG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
12.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 12-1.
It consists of control register ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value register ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA
converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF
AVSS
R/2
R
R/2
AVDD
Analog input
multiplexer
AIN0
A
Sample hold
circuit
Reference
voltage
Y
10
Analog
comparator
n
S EN
Successive approximate circuit
Shift clock
AINDS
ADRS
SAIN
INTADC
Control circuit
4
ADCCR1
2
AMD
IREFON
AIN7
3
ACK
ADCCR2
AD converter control register 1, 2
8
ADCDR1
2
EOCF ADBF
ADCDR2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 12-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 131
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
12.2 Register configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
12.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers:
1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1)
This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating.
2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2)
This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder
resistor network).
3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1)
This register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the AD converter.
4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2)
This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter.
AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1
(001CH)
7
ADRS
6
5
AMD
4
3
2
AINDS
1
SAIN
AD conversion start
0:
1:
AD conversion start
AMD
AD operating mode
00:
01:
10:
11:
AD operation disable
Software start mode
Reserved
Repeat mode
AINDS
Analog input control
0:
1:
Analog input enable
Analog input disable
Analog input channel select
0000:
0001:
0010:
0011:
0100:
0101:
0110:
0111:
1000:
1001:
1010:
1011:
1100:
1101:
1110:
1111:
AIN0
AIN1
AIN2
AIN3
AIN4
AIN5
AIN6
AIN7
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ADRS
SAIN
0
(Initial value: 0001 0000)
R/W
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDR2<ADBF> = "0").
Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCR1<AINDS> should be set to "1".
Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input
port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change.
Note 4: The ADCCR1<ADRS> is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion.
Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1<ADRS> newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1<ADRS> newly again, check
ADCDR2<EOCF> to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g.,
interrupt handling routine).
Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can
be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or
NORMAL2 mode.
Page 132
TMP86FH47ADUG
AD Converter Control Register 2
7
ADCCR2
(001DH)
6
IREFON
ACK
5
4
3
IREFON
"1"
2
1
ACK
0
"0"
(Initial value: **0* 000*)
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection
control
0:
1:
Connected only during AD conversion
Always connected
AD conversion time select
(Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
000:
001:
010:
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
39/fc
Reserved
78/fc
156/fc
312/fc
624/fc
1248/fc
Reserved
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCR2 to "1".
Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data.
Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can
be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or
NORMAL2 mode.
Table 12-1 ACK setting and Conversion time
Condition
ACK
000
Conversion
time
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
2 MHz
10 MHz
5 MHz
2.5 MHz
39/fc
-
-
-
19.5 µs
-
-
15.6 µs
001
Reserved
010
78/fc
-
-
19.5 µs
39.0 µs
-
15.6 µs
31.2 µs
011
156/fc
-
19.5 µs
39.0 µs
78.0 µs
15.6 µs
31.2 µs
62.4 µs
100
312/fc
19.5 µs
39.0 µs
78.0 µs
156.0 µs
31.2 µs
62.4 µs
124.8 µs
101
624/fc
39.0 µs
78.0 µs
156.0 µs
-
62.4 µs
124.8 µs
-
110
1248/fc
78.0 µs
156.0 µs
-
-
124.8 µs
-
-
111
Reserved
Note 1: Setting for "−" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Analog reference voltage (VAREF) .
-
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V
15.6 µs and more
-
VAREF = 2.7 to 5.5 V
31.2 µs and more
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDR1
(001FH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD09
AD08
AD07
AD06
AD05
AD04
AD03
AD02
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDR2
(001EH)
7
6
5
4
AD01
AD00
EOCF
ADBF
(Initial value: 0000 ****)
Page 133
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
12.2 Register configuration
TMP86FH47ADUG
EOCF
ADBF
AD conversion end flag
0:
1:
Before or during conversion
Conversion completed
AD conversion BUSY flag
0:
1:
During stop of AD conversion
During AD conversion
Read
only
Note 1: The ADCDR2<EOCF> is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to
ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1.
Note 2: The ADCDR2<ADBF> is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is
cleared upon entering STOP mode or SLOW mode .
Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 134
TMP86FH47ADUG
12.3 Function
12.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCR1<AMD> to “01” (software start mode), set ADCCR1<ADRS> to “1”. AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1<SAIN> is thereby started.
After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers
(ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2<EOCF> is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated.
ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1<ADRS> newly again
(Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR2<EOCF> to see that the
conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start
AD conversion start
ADCCR1<ADRS>
ADCDR2<ADBF>
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
EOCF cleared by reading
conversion result
ADCDR2<EOCF>
INTADC interrupt request
ADCDR1
ADCDR2
Conversion result
read
Conversion result
read
Conversion result
read
Conversion result
read
Figure 12-2 Software Start Mode
12.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1<SAIN> is performed repeatedly.
In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCR1<ADRS> to “1” after setting ADCCR1<AMD> to
“11” (Repeat mode).
After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers
(ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2<EOCF> is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated.
In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD
conversion, set ADCCR1<AMD> to “00” (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped
immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 135
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
12.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
ADCCR1<AMD>
“11”
“00”
AD conversion start
ADCCR1<ADRS>
1st conversion
result
Conversion operation
Indeterminate
ADCDR1,ADCDR2
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended.
Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDR2<EOCF>
EOCF cleared by reading
conversion result
INTADC interrupt request
ADCDR1
Conversion
result read
ADCDR2
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Figure 12-3 Repeat Mode
12.3.3
Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows:
• Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN).
• Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS).
• Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode).
2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows:
• Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 12-1 and AD converter control register 2.
• Choose IREFON for DA converter control.
3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1
(ADCCR1) to “1”. If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately.
4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted
value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to “1”, upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated.
5. EOCF is cleared to “0” by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register
read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is
completed.
Page 136
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 19.5 µs at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH nd store
the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
SLOOP :
: (port setting)
:
;Set port register approrriately before setting AD
converter registers.
:
:
(Refer to section I/O port in details)
LD
(ADCCR1) , 00100011B
; Select AIN3
LD
(ADCCR2) , 11011000B
;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation
mode
SET
(ADCCR1) . 7
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start)
TEST
(ADCDR2) . 5
; EOCF= 1 ?
JRS
T, SLOOP
LD
A , (ADCDR2)
LD
(9EH) , A
LD
A , (ADCDR1)
LD
(9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
12.4 STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation
is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value). Also, the
conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read
the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode).) When restored from standby mode
(STOP or SLOW mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion.
Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing
into the analog reference voltage.
Page 137
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
12.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
TMP86FH47ADUG
12.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 12-4.
3FFH
3FEH
3FDH
AD
conversion
result
03H
02H
01H
VAREF
0
1
2
3
1021 1022 1023 1024
Analog input voltage
AVSS
1024
Figure 12-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 138
TMP86FH47ADUG
12.6 Precautions about AD Converter
12.6.1 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are used at voltages within VAREF to AVSS. If any voltage
outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain.
The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
12.6.2 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog
inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary
to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other
pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
12.6.3 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 12-5. The higher the output
impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 kΩ or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance
AINi
Permissible signal
source impedance
5 kΩ (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 12 pF (typ.)
5 kΩ (max)
DA converter
Note) i = 7 to 0
Figure 12-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 139
12. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
12.6 Precautions about AD Converter
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 140
TMP86FH47ADUG
13. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86FH47ADUG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP2 to
STOP5) pins.
When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used.
In details, refer to the following section " 13.2 Control ".
13.1 Configuration
INT5
STOP
STOP mode
release signal
(1: Release)
STOP2
STOP3
STOP4
STOPCR
(0031H)
STOP5
STOP4
STOP3
STOP2
STOP5
Figure 13-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
13.2 Control
STOP2 to STOP5 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as
enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to
input mode by I/O port register beforehand.
Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR
7
6
5
4
(0031H)
STOP5
STOP4
STOP3
STOP2
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP5
STOP mode released by STOP5
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
STOP4
STOP mode released by STOP4
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
STOP3
STOP mode released by STOP3
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
STOP2
STOP mode released by STOP2
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
13.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the
"L" level on STOP2 to STOP5 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 141
13. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
13.3 Function
TMP86FH47ADUG
Also, each level of the STOP2 to STOP5 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register,
check all STOP2 to STOP5 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is startd (Note2,3).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1<RELM> = “0”), inhibit input from STOP2 to
STOP5 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP2 to STOP5 pins
that are available input during STOP mode.
Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP2 to STOP5 pins inputwhich is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an
instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release
sequence (Warm up).
Note 3: The input circuit of Key-on Wakeup input and Port input is separatedÅAso each input voltage threshold value is
diffrent. Therefore, a value comes from port input before STOP mode start may be diffrent from a value which is
detected by Key-on Wakeup input (Figure 13-2).
Note 4: STOP pin doesn’t have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP2 to
STOP5 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function.
Note 5: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on
Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may genarate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD
conversion input (analog voltage input).
Note 6: When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure
13-3).
External pin
Port input
Key-on wakeup
input
Figure 13-2 Key-on Wakeup Input and Port Input
b) In case of STOP2 to STOP5
a) STOP
STOP pin
STOP pin "L"
STOP mode
Release
STOP mode
STOP2 pin
STOP mode
Release
STOP mode
Figure 13-3 Priority of STOP pin and STOP2 to STOP5 pins
Table 13-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge)
Pin name
SYSCR1<RELM>="1"
(Note2)
SYSCR1<RELM>="0"
STOP
"H" level
Rising edge
STOP2
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
STOP3
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
STOP4
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
STOP5
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
Page 142
TMP86FH47ADUG
14. Flash Memory
TMP86FH47ADUG has 16384byte flash memory (address: C000H to FFFFH). The write and erase operations to
the flash memory are controlled in the following three types of mode.
- MCU mode
The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the MCU mode. This mode is used for software
bug correction and firmware change after shipment of the device since the write operation to the flash
memory is available by retaining the application behavior.
- Serial PROM mode
The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the serial PROM mode. Use of the serial interface
(UART) enables the flash memory to be controlled by the small number of pins. TMP86FH47ADUG in
the serial PROM mode supports on-board programming which enables users to program flash memory
after the microcontroller is mounted on a user board.
- Parallel PROM mode
The parallel PROM mode allows the flash memory to be accessed as a stand-alone flash memory by the
program writer provided by the third party. High-speed access to the flash memory is available by controlling address and data signals directly. For the support of the program writer, please ask Toshiba sales representative.
In the MCU and serial PROM modes, the flash memory control register (FLSCR) is used for flash memory control. This chapter describes how to access the flash memory using the flash memory control register (FLSCR) in the
MCU and serial PROM modes.
Page 143
14. Flash Memory
14.1 Flash Memory Control
TMP86FH47ADUG
14.1 Flash Memory Control
The flash memory is controlled via the flash memory control register (FLSCR) and flash memory stanby control
resister (FLSSTB).
Flash Memory Control Register
FLSCR
7
6
(0FFFH)
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLSMD
FLSMD
(Initial value : 1100 ****)
1100: Disable command sequence execution
0011: Enable command sequence execution
Others: Reserved
Flash memory command sequence execution control
R/W
Note 1: The command sequence of the flash memory can be executed only when FLSMD="0011B". In other cases, any attempts
to execute the command sequence are ineffective.
Note 2: FLSMD must be set to either "1100B" or "0011B".
Note 3: Bits 3 through 0 in FLSCR are always read as don’t care.
Flash Memory Standby Control Register
FLSSTB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(0FE9H)
0
FSTB
FSTB
Flash memory standby control
(Initial value : **** ***0)
0: Disable the standby function.
1: Enable the standby function.
Write
only
Note 1: When FSTB is set to 1, do not execute the read/write instruction to the flash memory because there is a possibility that the
expected data is not read or the program is not operated correctly. If executing the read/write instruction, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically.
Note 2: If an interrupt is issued when FSTB is set to 1, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically and then the vector area of the flash
memory is read.
Note 3: If the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode is activated when FSTB is set to 1, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically. In
the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode, the standby function operates regardless of FSTB setting.
14.1.1 Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR<FLSMD>)
The flash memory can be protected from inadvertent write due to program error or microcontroller misoperation. This write protection feature is realized by disabling flash memory command sequence execution via the
flash memory control register (write protect). To enable command sequence execution, set FLSCR<FLSMD>
to “0011B”. To disable command sequence execution, set FLSCR<FLSMD> to “1100B”. After reset,
FLSCR<FLSMD> is initialized to “1100B” to disable command sequence execution. Normally,
FLSCR<FLSMD> should be set to “1100B” except when the flash memory needs to be written or erased.
14.1.2 Flash Memory Standby Control (FLSSTB<FSTB>)
Low power consumption is enabled by cutting off the steady-state current of the flash memory. In the
IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode, the steady-state current of the flash memory is cut off automatically.
When the program is executed in the RAM area (without accessing the flash memory) in the NORMAL 1/2
or SLOW1/2 mode, the current can be cut off by the control of the register. To cut off the steady-state current of
the flash memory, set FLSSTB<FSTB> to “1” by the control program in the RAM area. The procedures for
controlling the FLSSTB register are explained below.
(Steps1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 8 are controlled by the
write control program executed in the RAM area.)
Page 144
TMP86FH47ADUG
1. Transfer the control program of the FLSSTB register to the RAM area.
2. Jump to the RAM area.
3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF = “0”).
4. Set FLSSTB<FSTB> to “1”.
5. Execute the user program.
6. Repeat step 5 until the return request to the flash memory is detected.
7. Set FLSSTB<FSTB> to “0”.
8. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: The standby function is not operated by setting FLSSTB<FSTB> with the program in the flash memory. You
must set FLSSTB<FSTB> by the program in the RAM area.
Note 2: To use the standby function by setting FLSSTB<FSTB> to “1” with the program in the RAM area,
FLSSTB<FSTB> must be set to “0” by the program in the RAM area before returning the program control to
the flash memory. If the program control is returned to the flash memory with FLSSTB<FSTB> set to “1”,
the program may misoperate and run out of control.
Page 145
14. Flash Memory
14.2 Command Sequence
TMP86FH47ADUG
14.2 Command Sequence
The command sequence in the MCU and the serial PROM modes consists of six commands (JEDEC compatible),
as shown in Table 14-1. Addresses specified in the command sequence are recognized with the lower 12 bits
(excluding BA, SA, and FF7FH used for read protection). The upper 4 bits are used to specify the flash memory
area,
Table 14-1 Command Sequence
Command
Sequence
1st Bus Write
Cycle
2nd Bus Write
Cycle
3rd Bus Write
Cycle
4th Bus Write
Cycle
5th Bus Write
Cycle
6th Bus Write
Cycle
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
1
Byte program
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
A0H
BA
(Note 1)
Data
(Note 1)
-
-
-
-
2
Sector Erase
(4-kbyte Erase)
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
80H
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
SA
(Note 2)
30H
3
Chip Erase
(All Erase)
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
80H
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
10H
4
Product ID Entry
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
90H
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID Exit
XXH
F0H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID Exit
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
F0H
-
-
-
-
-
-
Read Protect
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
A5H
FF7FH
00H
-
-
-
-
5
6
Note 1: Set the address and data to be written.
Note 2: The area to be erased is specified with the upper 4 bits of the address.
14.2.1 Byte Program
This command writes the flash memory for each byte unit. The addresses and data to be written are specified
in the 4th bus write cycle. Each byte can be programmed in a maximum of 40 µs. The next command sequence
cannot be executed until the write operation is completed. To check the completion of the write operation, perform read operations repeatedly until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory.
During the write operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data
(toggling between 0 and 1).
Note:To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to
erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
14.2.2 Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase)
This command erases the flash memory in units of 4 kbytes. The flash memory area to be erased is specified
by the upper 4 bits of the 6th bus write cycle address. For example, to erase 4 kbytes from F000H to FFFFH,
specify one of the addresses in F000H-FFFFH as the 6th bus write cycle. The sector erase command is effective only in the MCU and serial PROM modes, and it cannot be used in the parallel PROM mode.
A maximum of 30 ms is required to erase 4 kbytes. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the
erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the
erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling
between 0 and 1).
Page 146
TMP86FH47ADUG
14.2.3 Chip Erase (All Erase)
This command erases the entire flash memory in approximately 30 ms. The next command sequence cannot
be executed until the erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform
read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash
memory. During the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6
of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). After the chip is erased, all bytes contain FFH.
14.2.4 Product ID Entry
This command activates the Product ID mode. In the Product ID mode, the vendor ID, the flash ID, and the
read protection status can be read from the flash memory.
Table 14-2 Values To Be Read in the Product ID Mode
Address
Meaning
F000H
Vendor ID
98H
F001H
Flash macro ID
41H
F002H
FF7FH
Read Value
Flash size
0EH:
60 kbytes
0BH:
48 kbytes
07H:
32 kbytes
05H:
24 kbytes
03H:
16 kbytes
01H:
8 kbytes
00H:
4 kbytes
FFH:
Read protection disabled
Read protection status
Other than FFH: Read protection enabled
Note: The value at address F002H (flash size) depends on the size of flash memory incorporated in each product. For example, if
the product has 60-kbyte flash memory, "0EH" is read from address F002H.
14.2.5 Product ID Exit
This command is used to exit the Product ID mode.
14.2.6 Read Protect
This command enables the read protection setting in the flash memory. When the read protection is enabled,
the flash memory cannot be read in the parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the flash write and
RAM loader commands cannot be executed.
To disable the read protection setting, it is necessary to execute the chip erase command sequence. Whether
or not the read protection is enabled can be checked by reading FF7FH in the Product ID mode. For details, see
Table 14-2.
It takes a maximum of 40 µs to set read protection in the flash memory. The next command sequence cannot
be executed until this operation is completed. To check the completion of the read protect operation, perform
read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash
memory. During the read protect operation, any attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the
data (toggling between 0 and 1).
Page 147
14. Flash Memory
14.3 Toggle Bit (D6)
TMP86FH47ADUG
14.3 Toggle Bit (D6)
After the byte program, chip erase, and read protect command sequence is executed, any consecutive attempts to
read from the same address is reversed bit 6 (D6) of the data (toggling between 0 and 1) until the operation is completed. Therefore, this toggle bit provides a software mechanism to check the completion of each operation. Usually
perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the
flash memory. After the byte program, chip erase, or read protect command sequence is executed, the initial read of
the toggle bit always produces a "1".
Page 148
TMP86FH47ADUG
14.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
When the write, erase and read protections are set in the flash memory, read and fetch operations cannot be performed in the entire flash memory area. Therefore, to perform these operations in the entire flash memory area,
access to the flash memory area by the control program in the BOOTROM or RAM area. (The flash memory program cannot write to the flash memory.) The serial PROM or MCU mode is used to run the control program in the
BOOTROM or RAM area.
Note 1: The flash memory can be written or read for each byte unit. Erase operations can be performed either in the entire
area or in units of 4 kbytes, whereas read operations can be performed by an one transfer instruction. However,
the command sequence method is adopted for write and erase operations, requiring several-byte transfer instructions for each operation.
Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase
the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
14.4.1 Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode
The serial PROM mode is used to access to the flash memory by the control program provided in the
BOOTROM area. Since almost of all operations relating to access to the flash memory can be controlled simply by the communication data of the serial interface (UART), these functions are transparent to the user. For
the details of the serial PROM mode, see “Serial PROM Mode.”
To access to the flash memory by using peripheral functions in the serial PROM mode, run the RAM loader
command to execute the control program in the RAM area. The procedures to execute the control program in
the RAM area is shown in " 14.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the
RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode) ".
14.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in
the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the BOOTROM, and steps 3 through 9 are controlled by the control
program executed in the RAM area.)
1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area in the RAM loader mode.
2. Jump to the RAM area.
3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF←"0").
4. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution).
5. Execute the erase command sequence.
6. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 6 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.)
7. Execute the write command sequence.
8. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 8 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.)
9. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution).
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master
enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the
write control program in the RAM area.
Note 2: Since the watchdog timer is disabled by the BOOTROM in the RAM loader mode, it is not required to
disable the watchdog timer by the RAM loader program.
Page 149
14. Flash Memory
14.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :After chip erasure, the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address F000H.
DI
: Disable interrupts (IMF←"0")
LD
(FLSCR),0011_1000B
LD
IX,0F555H
LD
IY,0FAAAH
LD
HL,0F000H
: Enable command sequence execution.
; #### Flash Memory Chip erase Process ####
sLOOP1:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),80H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 4th bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 5th bus write cycle
LD
(IX),10H
: 6th bus write cycle
LD
W,(IX)
CMP
W,(IX)
JR
NZ,sLOOP1
: Loop until the same value is read.
; #### Flash Memory Write Process ####
sLOOP2:
sLOOP3:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0A0H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(HL),3FH
: 4th bus write cycle, (F000H)=3FH
LD
W,(HL)
CMP
W,(HL)
JR
NZ,sLOOP2
: Loop until the same value is read.
LD
(FLSCR),1100_1000B
: Disable command sequence execution.
JP
sLOOP3
Page 150
TMP86FH47ADUG
14.4.2 Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode
In the MCU mode, write operations are performed by executing the control program in the RAM area.
Before execution of the control program, copy the control program into the RAM area or obtain it from the
external using the communication pin. The procedures to execute the control program in the RAM area in the
MCU mode are described below.
14.4.2.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the
RAM area (in the MCU mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 11 are controlled
by the control program in the RAM area.)
1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area.
2. Jump to the RAM area.
3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF←"0").
4. Disable the watchdog timer, if it is used.
5. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution).
6. Execute the erase command sequence.
7. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 7 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.)
8. Execute the write command sequence.
9. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.)
10. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution).
11. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master
enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the
write control program in the RAM area.
Note 2: When writing to the flash memory, do not intentionally use non-maskable interrupts (the watchdog
timer must be disabled if it is used). If a non-maskable interrupt occurs while the flash memory is
being written, unexpected data is read from the flash memory (interrupt vector), resulting in malfunction of the microcontroller.
Page 151
14. Flash Memory
14.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
TMP86FH47ADUG
Example :After sector erasure (E000H-EFFFH), the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address
E000H.
DI
: Disable interrupts (IMF←"0")
LD
(WDTCR2),4EH
: Clear the WDT binary counter.
LDW
(WDTCR1),0B101H
: Disable the WDT.
LD
(FLSCR),0011_1000B
: Enable command sequence execution.
LD
IX,0F555H
LD
IY,0FAAAH
LD
HL,0E000H
; #### Flash Memory Sector Erase Process ####
sLOOP1:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),80H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 4th bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 5th bus write cycle
LD
(HL),30H
: 6th bus write cycle
LD
W,(IX)
CMP
W,(IX)
JR
NZ,sLOOP1
: Loop until the same value is read.
; #### Flash Memory Write Process ####
sLOOP2:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0A0H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(HL),3FH
: 4th bus write cycle, (1000H)=3FH
LD
W,(HL)
CMP
W,(HL)
JR
NZ,sLOOP2
: Loop until the same value is read.
LD
(FLSCR),1100_1000B
: Disable command sequence execution.
JP
XXXXH
: Jump to the flash memory area.
Example :This write control program reads data from address F000H and stores it to 98H in the RAM area.
LD
A,(0F000H)
: Read data from address F000H.
LD
(98H),A
: Store data to address 98H.
Page 152
TMP86FH47ADUG
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.1 Outline
The TMP86FH47ADUG has a 2048 byte BOOTROM (Mask ROM) for programming to flash memory. The
BOOTROM is available in the serial PROM mode, and controlled by TEST, BOOT and RESET pins. Communication is performed via UART. The serial PROM mode has seven types of operating mode: Flash memory writing,
RAM loader, Flash memory SUM output, Product ID code output, Flash memory status output, Flash memory erasing and Flash memory read protection setting. Memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode differs from that
in the MCU mode. Figure 15-1 shows memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode.
Table 15-1 Operating Range in the Serial PROM Mode
Parameter
Power supply
High frequency (Note)
Min
Max
Unit
4.5
5.5
V
2
16
MHz
Note: Though included in above operating range, some of high frequencies are not supported in the serial PROM mode. For
details, refer to “Table 15-5”.
15.2 Memory Mapping
The Figure 15-1 shows memory mapping in the Serial PROM mode and MCU mode.
In the serial PROM mode, the BOOTROM (Mask ROM) is mapped in addresses from 7800H to 7FFFH.
0000H
SFR
003FH
0040H
RAM
0000H
64 bytes
SFR
512 bytes
RAM
023FH
64 bytes
512 bytes
023FH
0F80H
0F80H
128 bytes
DBR
003FH
0040H
128 bytes
DBR
0FFFH
0FFFH
7800H
BOOTROM
7FFFH
2048 bytes
C000H
Flash memory
C000H
Flash memory
16384 bytes
FFFFH
16384 bytes
FFFFH
Serial PROM mode
Figure 15-1 Memory Address Maps
Page 153
MCU mode
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
15.3.1 Serial PROM Mode Control Pins
To execute on-board programming, activate the serial PROM mode. Table 15-2 shows pin setting to activate
the serial PROM mode.
Table 15-2 Serial PROM Mode Setting
Pin
Setting
TEST pin
High
BOOT/RXD pin
High
RESET pin
Note: The BOOT pin is shared with the UART communication pin (RXD pin) in the serial PROM mode. This pin is used as UART
communication pin after activating serial PROM mode
15.3.2 Pin Function
In the serial PROM mode, TXD (P03) and RXD (P02) are used as a serial interface pin.
Table 15-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode
Pin Name
(Serial PROM Mode)
Input/
Output
Pin Name
(MCU Mode)
Function
TXD
Output
Serial data output
BOOT/RXD
Input/Input
Serial PROM mode control/Serial data input
RESET
Input/Output
Serial PROM mode control
RESET
TEST
Input
Fixed to high
TEST
VDD, AVDD
Power
supply
4.5 to 5.5 V
VSS, AVSS
Power
supply
0V
VAREF
Power
supply
Leave open or apply input reference voltage.
I/O ports except
P03, P02
I/O
XIN
Input
XOUT
Output
P03
(Note 1)
P02
These ports are in the high-impedance state in the serial PROM mode. The input level is fixed to
the port inputs with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current. (The port inputs are invalid.) To
make the port inputs valid, set the pin of the SPCR register to “1” by the RAM loader control program.
Self-oscillate with an oscillator.
(Note 2)
Note 1: During on-board programming with other parts mounted on a user board, be careful no to affect these communication
control pins.
Note 2: Operating range of high frequency in serial PROM mode is 2 MHz to 16 MHz.
Page 154
TMP86FH47ADUG
TMP86FH47ADUG
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V)
VDD
Serial PROM mode
TEST
MCU mode
XIN
pull-up
BOOT / RXD (P02)
TXD (P03)
XOUT
External control
RESET
VSS
GND
Figure 15-2 Serial PROM Mode Pin Setting
Note 1: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 15-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
15.3.3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Figure 15-3 shows an example connection to perform on-board wring.
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V)
VDD
Serial PROM mode
TEST
Pull-up
MCU mode
BOOT / RXD (P02)
Level
converter
TXD (P03)
PC control
(Note 2)
Other
parts
RESET
control
(Note 1)
RC power-on
reset circuit
RESET
XIN
XOUT
VSS
GND
Application board
External control board
Figure 15-3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Note 1: When other parts on the application board effect the UART communication in the serial PROM mode, isolate these pins by a jumper or switch.
Note 2: When the reset control circuit on the application board effects activation of the serial PROM mode, isolate
the pin by a jumper or switch.
Note 3: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 15-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
Page 155
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.3.4 Activating the Serial PROM Mode
The following is a procedure to activate the serial PROM mode. " Figure 15-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing "
shows a serial PROM mode timing.
1. Supply power to the VDD pin.
2. Set the RESET pin to low.
3. Set the TEST pin and BOOT/RXD pins to high.
4. Wait until the power supply and clock oscillation stabilize.
5. Set the RESET pin to high.
6. Input the matching data (5AH) to the BOOT/RXD pin after setup sequence. For details of the setup
timing, refer to " 15.16 UART Timing ".
VDD
TEST(Input)
RESET(Input)
PROGRAM
BOOT/RXD (Input)
don't care
Reset mode
High level setting
Serial PROM mode
Setup time for serial PROM mode (Rxsup)
Matching data
input
Figure 15-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing
Page 156
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.4 Interface Specifications for UART
The following shows the UART communication format used in the serial PROM mode.
To perform on-board programming, the communication format of the write controller must also be set in the same
manner.
The default baud rate is 9600 bps regardless of operating frequency of the microcontroller. The baud rate can be
modified by transmitting the baud rate modification data shown in Table 1-4 to TMP86FH47ADUG. The Table 15-5
shows an operating frequency and baud rate. The frequencies which are not described in Table 15-5 can not be used.
- Baud rate (Default): 9600 bps
- Data length: 8 bits
- Parity addition: None
- Stop bit: 1 bit
Table 15-4 Baud Rate Modification Data
Baud rate modification data
04H
05H
06H
07H
0AH
18H
28H
Baud rate (bps)
76800
62500
57600
38400
31250
19200
9600
Page 157
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.4 Interface Specifications for UART
TMP86FH47ADUG
Table 15-5 Operating Frequency and Baud Rate in the Serial PROM Mode
(Note 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reference Baud Rate
(bps)
76800
62500
57600
38400
31250
19200
9600
Baud Rate Modification
Data
04H
05H
06H
07H
0AH
18H
28H
Ref. Frequency
(MHz)
Rating
(MHz)
Baud
rate
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
2
1.91 to 2.10
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9615
+0.16
4
3.82 to 4.19
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
31250
0.00
19231
+0.16
9615
+0.16
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
4.19
3.82 to 4.19
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
32734
+4.75
20144
+4.92
10072
+4.92
4.9152
4.70 to 5.16
-
-
-
-
-
-
38400
0.00
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
5
4.70 to 5.16
-
-
-
-
-
-
39063
+1.73
-
-
19531
+1.73
9766
+1.73
6
5.87 to 6.45
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9375
-2.34
-
6.144
5.87 to 6.45
-
-
7.3728
7.05 to 7.74
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9600
0.00
-
57600
0.00
-
-
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
8
7.64 to 8.39
-
-
62500
0.00
-
-
38462
+0.16
31250
0.00
19231
+0.16
9615
+0.16
9.8304
9.40 to 10.32
76800
0.00
-
-
-
-
38400
0.00
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
10
9.40 to 10.32
78125
+1.73
-
-
-
-
39063
+1.73
-
-
19531
+1.73
9766
+1.73
12
11.75 to 12.90
-
-
-
-
57692
+0.16
-
-
31250
0.00
18750
-2.34
9375
-2.34
12.288
11.75 to 12.90
-
-
-
-
59077
+2.56
-
-
32000
+2.40
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
12.5
11.75 to 12.90
-
-
60096
-3.85
60096
+4.33
-
-
30048
-3.85
19531
+1.73
9766
+1.73
9
14.7456
14.10 to 15.48
-
-
-
-
57600
0.00
38400
0.00
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
10
16
15.27 to 16.77
76923
+0.16
62500
0.00
-
-
38462
+0.16
31250
0.00
19231
+0.16
9615
+0.16
Note 1: “Ref. Frequency” and “Rating” show frequencies available in the serial PROM mode. Though the frequency is supported
in the serial PROM mode, the serial PROM mode may not be activated correctly due to the frequency difference in the
external controller (such as personal computer) and oscillator, and load capacitance of communication pins.
Note 2: It is recommended that the total frequency difference is within ±3% so that auto detection is performed correctly by the reference frequency.
Note 3: The external controller must transmit the matching data (5AH) repeatedly till the auto detection of baud rate is performed.
This number indicates the number of times the matching data is transmitted for each frequency.
Page 158
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.5 Operation Command
The eight commands shown in Table 15-6 are used in the serial PROM mode. After reset release, the
TMP86FH47ADUG waits for the matching data (5AH).
Table 15-6 Operation Command in the Serial PROM Mode
Command Data
Operating Mode
Description
5AH
Setup
Matching data. Execute this command after releasing the reset.
F0H
Flash memory erasing
Erases the flash memory area (address C000H to FFFFH).
30H
Flash memory writing
Writes to the flash memory area (address C000H to FFFFH).
60H
RAM loader
Writes to the specified RAM area (address 0050H to 023FH).
90H
Flash memory SUM output
Outputs the 2-byte checksum upper byte and lower byte in this order for the
entire area of the flash memory (address C000H to FFFFH).
C0H
Product ID code output
Outputs the product ID code (13-byte data).
C3H
Flash memory status output
Outputs the status code (7-byte data) such as the read protection condition.
FAH
Flash memory read protection setting
Enables the read protection.
15.6 Operation Mode
The serial PROM mode has seven types of modes, that are (1) Flash memory erasing, (2) Flash memory writing,
(3) RAM loader, (4) Flash memory SUM output, (5) Product ID code output, (6) Flash memory status output and (7)
Flash memory read protection setting modes. Description of each mode is shown below.
1. Flash memory erasing mode
The flash memory is erased by the chip erase (erasing an entire flash area) or sector erase (erasing sectors in
4-kbyte units). The erased area is filled with FFH. When the read protection is enabled, the sector erase in
the flash erasing mode can not be performed. To disable the read protection, perform the chip erase. Before
erasing the flash memory, TMP86FH47ADUG checks the passwords except a blank product. If the password is not matched, the flash memory erasing mode is not activated.
2. Flash memory writing mode
Data is written to the specified flash memory address for each byte unit. The external controller must transmit the write data in the Intel Hex format (Binary). If no error is encountered till the end record,
TMP86FH47ADUG calculates the checksum for the entire flash memory area (C000H to FFFFH), and
returns the obtained result to the external controller. When the read protection is enabled, the flash memory
writing mode is not activated. In this case, perform the chip erase command beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the flash memory writing mode, TMP86FH47ADUG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not matched, flash memory writing mode is not activated.
3. RAM loader mode
The RAM loader transfers the data in Intel Hex format sent from the external controller to the internal
RAM. When the transfer is completed normally, the RAM loader calculates the checksum. After transmitting the results, the RAM loader jumps to the RAM address specified with the first data record in order to
execute the user program. When the read protection is enabled, the RAM loader mode is not activated. In
this case, perform the chip erase beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the RAM
loader mode, TMP86FH47ADUG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not
matched, flash RAM loader mode is not activated.
4. Flash memory SUM output mode
The checksum is calculated for the entire flash memory area (C000H to FFFFH), and the result is returned
to the external controller. Since the BOOTROM does not support the operation command to read the flash
memory, use this checksum to identify programs when managing revisions of application programs.
5. Product ID code output
The code used to identify the product is output. The code to be output consists of 13-byte data, which
includes the information indicating the area of the ROM incorporated in the product. The external controller reads this code, and recognizes the product to write.
(In the case of TMP86FH47ADUG, the addresses from C000H to FFFFH become the ROM area.)
Page 159
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
6. Flash memory status output mode
The status of the area from FFE0H to FFFFH, and the read protection condition are output as 7-byte code.
The external controller reads this code to recognize the flash memory status.
7. Flash memory read protection setting mode
This mode disables reading the flash memory data in parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the
flash memory writing and RAM loader modes are disabled. To disable the flash memory read protection,
perform the chip erase in the flash memory erasing mode.
Page 160
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.1 Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H)
Table 15-7 shows the flash memory erasing mode.
Table 15-7 Flash Memory Erasing Mode
Transfer Data from the External
Controller to TMP86FH47ADUG
Transfer Byte
BOOT
ROM
Baud Rate
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
the External Controller
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: No data transmitted
3rd byte
4th byte
Baud rate change data (Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (F0H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (F0H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address bit
15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address bit
07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted)
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
-
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th - 2 byte
Erase area specification (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
-
n’th - 1 byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Checksum (Upper byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Checksum (Lower byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th + 1 byte
(Wait for the next operation command
data)
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of xxh.
Note 2: Refer to " 15.13 Specifying the Erasure Area ".
Note 3: Refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Note 4: Refer to " 15.10 Passwords ".
Note 5: Do not transmit the password string for a blank product.
Note 6: When a password error occurs, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. Therefore,
when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Note 7: If an error occurs during transfer of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET
pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of the flash memory erasing mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
Page 161
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory erasing mode
(F0H).
3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 15-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
this case, F0H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the
device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th thorough m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode. In the case of a blank product, do not transmit a password string. (Do not
transmit a dummy password string.)
5. The n’th - 2 byte contains the erasure area specification data. The upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits specify
the start address and end address of the erasure area, respectively. For the detailed description, see
“1.13 Specifying the Erasure Area”.
6. The n’th - 1 byte and n’th byte contain the upper and lower bytes of the checksum, respectively. For
how to calculate the checksum, refer to “1.8 Checksum (SUM)”. Checksum is calculated unless a
receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end record, the external controller
judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device.
7. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 162
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.2 Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H)
Table 15-8 shows flash memory writing mode process.
Table 15-8 Flash Memory Writing Mode Process
Transfer Byte
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller
to TMP86FH47ADUG
Baud Rate
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
External Controller
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5Ah)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (30H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (30H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address bit
15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address bit
07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted)
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 5)
Modified baud rate
-
m’th + 1 byte
:
n’th - 2 byte
Intel Hex format (binary)
(Note 2)
n’th - 1 byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th + 1 byte
(Wait state for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
-
-
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 15.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 15.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ".
Note 3: Refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Note 4: Refer to " 15.10 Passwords ".
Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required
to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the
external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison
start address, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password
error occurs, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode.
Note 6: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters
the halt confition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode.
Note 7: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the
serial PROM mode.
Page 163
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
Description of the flash memory writing mode
1. The 1st byte of the received data contains the matching data. When the serial PROM mode is activated, TMP86FH47ADUG (hereafter called device), waits to receive the matching data (5AH). Upon
reception of the matching data, the device automatically adjusts the UART’s initial baud rate to 9600
bps.
2. When receiving the matching data (5AH), the device transmits an echo back data (5AH) as the second
byte data to the external controller. If the device can not recognize the matching data, it does not
transmit the echo back data and waits for the matching data again with automatic baud rate adjustment. Therefore, the external controller should transmit the matching data repeatedly till the device
transmits an echo back data. The transmission repetition count varies depending on the frequency of
device. For details, refer to Table 15-5.
3. The 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data. The five types of baud rate
modification data shown in Table 15-4 are available. Even if baud rate is not modified, the external
controller should transmit the initial baud rate data (28H: 9600 bps).
4. Only when the 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data corresponding to
the device's operating frequency, the device echoes back data the value which is the same data in the
4th byte position of the received data. After the echo back data is transmitted, baud rate modification
becomes effective. If the 3rd byte of the received data does not contain the baud rate modification
data, the device enters the halts condition after sending 3 bytes of baud rate modification error code
(62H).
5. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data (30H) to write the flash memory.
6. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
this case, 30H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the
device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H).
7. The 7th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password count storage address. When the data
received with the 7th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving
error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
8. The 9th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password count storage address. When the data
received with the 9th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving
error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
9. The 11th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password comparison start address. When the
data received with the 11th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
10. The 13th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password comparison start address. When the
data received with the 13th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
11. The 15th through m’th bytes contain the password data. The number of passwords becomes the data
(N) stored in the password count storage address. The external password data is compared with Nbyte data from the address specified by the password comparison start address. The external controller should send N-byte password data to the device. If the passwords do not match, the device enters
the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. If the addresses from
FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not conpared because the device is considered as a blank product.
12. The m’th + 1 through n’th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH
for “:”) in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data
except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device
receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum.
Since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller
should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format
error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller.
13. The n’th - 1 and n’th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end
record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end
Page 164
TMP86FH47ADUG
record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the
checksum sent by the device.
14. After transmitting the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Note 1: Do not write only the address from FFE0H to FFFFH when all flash memory data is the same. If only these
area are written, the subsequent operation can not be executed due to password error.
Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to
erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 165
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.3 RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H)
Table 15-9 shows RAM loader mode process.
Table 15-9 RAM Loader Mode Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
RAM
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH47ADUG
Baud Rate
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
External Controller
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (60H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (60H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address bit
15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address bit
07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 5)
Modified baud rate
-
m’th + 1 byte
:
n’th - 2 byte
Intel Hex format (Binary)
(Note 2)
n’th - 1 byte
-
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
Modified baud rate
-
Modified baud rate
-
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
-
The program jumps to the start address of RAM in which the first transferred data is written.
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 15.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 15.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ".
Note 3: Refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Note 4: Refer to " 15.10 Passwords ".
Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required
to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the
external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison
start address, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password
error occurs, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode.
Note 6: After transmitting a password string, the external controller must not transmit only an end record. If receiving an end
record after a password string, the device may not operate correctly.
Note 7: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters
the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Page 166
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 8: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the
serial PROM mode.
Description of RAM loader mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
2. In the 5th byte of the received data contains the RAM loader command data (60H).
3. When th 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position (in this case, 60H). If the
5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th through m’th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
5. The m’th + 1 through n’th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH
for “:”) in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data
except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device
receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum.
The writing data of the data record is written into RAM specified by address. Since the device starts
checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device
enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller.
6. The n’th - 1 and n’th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end
record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end
record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the
checksum sent by the device.
7. After transmitting the checksum to the external controller, the boot program jumps to the RAM
address that is specified by the first received data record.
Note 1: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to
erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 167
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.4 Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H)
Table 15-10 shows flash memory SUM output mode process.
Table 15-10 Flash Memory SUM Output Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH47ADUG
Baud Rate
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
External Controller
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (90H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (90H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 2)
Error: Nothing transmitted
8th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 2)
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 15.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Description of the flash memory SUM output mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory SUM output mode
(90H).
3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
this case, 90H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the
device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th and the 8th bytes contain the upper and lower bits of the checksum, respectively. For how to
calculate the checksum, refer to " 15.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 168
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.5 Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H)
Table 15-11 shows product ID code output mode process.
Table 15-11 Product ID Code Output Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller
to TMP86FH47ADUG
Baud Rate
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
External Controller
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (C0H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (C0H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
Modified baud rate
3AH
Start mark
8th byte
Modified baud rate
0AH
The number of transfer data
(from 9th to 18th bytes)
9th byte
Modified baud rate
02H
Length of address (2 bytes)
10th byte
Modified baud rate
1DH
Reserved data
11th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
12th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
13th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
14th byte
Modified baud rate
01H
ROM block count (1 block)
15th byte
Modified baud rate
C0H
First address of ROM
(Upper byte)
16th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
First address of ROM
(Lower byte)
17th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
End address of ROM
(Upper byte)
18th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
End address of ROM
(Lower byte)
19th byte
Modified baud rate
22H
Checksum of transferred data
(9th through 18th byte)
Modified baud rate
-
20th byte
(Wait for the next operation command
data)
Note: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 15.7 Error
Code ".
Description of Product ID code output mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the product ID code output mode command data (C0H).
3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 15-6, the device echoes back
the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C0H). If the
5th byte data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after
sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 9th through 19th bytes contain the product ID code. For details, refer to " 15.11 Product ID Code
".
Page 169
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 170
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.6 Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H)
Table 15-12 shows Flash memory status output mode process.
Table 15-12 Flash Memory Status Output Mode Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH47ADUG
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (C3H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (C3H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
Modified baud rate
3AH
Start mark
8th byte
Modified baud rate
04H
Byte count
(from 9th to 12th byte)
9th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
to
03H
Status code 1
10th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
11th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
12th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
13th byte
Modified baud rate
Checksum 2’s complement for the sum of 9th
through 12th bytes
9th byte Checksum
00H:
00H
01H:
FFH
02H:
FEH
03H:
FDH
Modified baud rate
-
14th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 15.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: For the details on status code 1, refer to " 15.12 Flash Memory Status Code ".
Description of Flash memory status output mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the flash memory status output mode command data
(C3H).
3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 15-6, the device echoes back
the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C3H). If the
5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 9th through 13th bytes contain the status code. For details on the status code, refer to " 15.12
Flash Memory Status Code ".
5. After sending the status code, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 171
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.6.7 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH)
Table 15-13 shows Flash memory read protection setting mode process.
Table 15-13 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode Process
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH47ADUG
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from TMP86FH47ADUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 15-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (FAH)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (FAH)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address
15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address
07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start
address 15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start
address 07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
-
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: FBH (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’+1th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 15.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 15.10 Passwords ".
Note 3: If the read protection is enabled for a blank product or a password error occurs for a non-blank product,
TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by
the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Note 4: If an error occurs during reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FH47ADUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial
PROM mode.
Description of the Flash memory read protection setting mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory status output mode
(FAH).
3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
Page 172
TMP86FH47ADUG
this case, FAH). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the
halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th through m’th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
5. The n'th byte contains the status to be transmitted to the external controller in the case of the successful read protection.
Page 173
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.7 Error Code
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.7 Error Code
When detecting an error, the device transmits the error code to the external controller, as shown in Table 15-14.
Table 15-14 Error Code
Transmit Data
Meaning of Error Data
62H, 62H, 62H
Baud rate modification error.
63H, 63H, 63H
Operation command error.
A1H, A1H, A1H
Framing error in the received data.
A3H, A3H, A3H
Overrun error in the received data.
Note: If a password error occurs, TMP86FH47ADUG does not transmit an error code.
15.8 Checksum (SUM)
15.8.1 Calculation Method
The checksum (SUM) is calculated with the sum of all bytes, and the obtained result is returned as a word.
The data is read for each byte unit and the calculated result is returned as a word.
Example:
A1H
B2H
C3H
D4H
If the data to be calculated consists of the four bytes,
the checksum of the data is as shown below.
A1H + B2H + C3H + D4H = 02EAH
SUM (HIGH)= 02H
SUM (LOW)= EAH
The checksum which is transmitted by executing the flash memory write command, RAM loader command,
or flash memory SUM output command is calculated in the manner, as shown above.
Page 174
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.8.2 Calculation data
The data used to calculate the checksum is listed in Table 15-15.
Table 15-15 Checksum Calculation Data
Operating Mode
Calculation Data
Description
Data in the entire area of the flash memory
Even when a part of the flash memory is written, the checksum
of the entire flash memory area (C000H to FFFH) is calculated.
The data length, address, record type and checksum in Intel
Hex format are not included in the checksum.
RAM loader mode
RAM data written in the first received RAM
address through the last received RAM address
The length of data, address, record type and checksum in Intel
Hex format are not included in the checksum.
Product ID Code
Output mode
9th through 18th bytes of the transferred data
For details, refer to " 15.11 Product ID Code ".
Flash Memory Status Output mode
9th through 12th bytes of the transferred data
For details, refer to " 15.12 Flash Memory Status Code "
Flash Memory Erasing mode
All data in the erased area of the flash memory
(the whole or part of the flash memory)
When the sector erase is executed, only the erased area is
used to calculate the checksum. In the case of the chip erase,
an entire area of the flash memory is used.
Flash memory writing mode
Flash memory SUM output
mode
Page 175
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary)
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary)
1. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device waits for the start mark (3AH “:”) of the next data
record. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device ignores the data except 3AH transmitted
by the external controller.
2. After transmitting the checksum of end record, the external controller must transmit nothing, and wait for
the 2-byte receive data (upper and lower bytes of the checksum).
3. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning
an error code to the external controller. The Intel Hex format error occurs in the following case:
When the record type is not 00H, 01H, or 02H
When a checksum error occurs
When the data length of an extended record (record type = 02H) is not 02H
When the device receives the data record after receiving an extended record (record type = 02H) with
extended address of 1000H or larger.
When the data length of the end record (record type = 01H) is not 00H
15.10Passwords
The consecutive eight or more-byte data in the flash memory area can be specified to the password.
TMP86FH47ADUG compares the data string specified to the password with the password string transmitted from
the external controller. The area in which passwords can be specified is located at addresses C000H to FF9FH. The
area from FFA0H to FFFFH can not be specified as the passwords area.
If addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not compared because the
product is considered as a blank product. Even in this case, the password count storage addresses and password
comparison start address must be specified. Table 15-16 shows the password setting in the blank product and nonblank product.
Table 15-16 Password Setting in the Blank Product and Non-Blank Product
Password
Blank Product (Note 1)
Non-Blank Product
PNSA
(Password count storage address)
C000H ≤ PNSA ≤ FF9FH
C000H ≤ PNSA ≤ FF9FH
PCSA
(Password comparison start address)
C000H ≤ PCSA ≤ FF9FH
C000H ≤ PCSA ≤ FFA0 - N
N
(Password count)
*
8≤N
Password string setting
Not required (Note 5)
Required (Note 2)
Note 1: When addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the product is recognized as a blank product.
Note 2: The data including the same consecutive data (three or more bytes) can not be used as a password. (This causes a password error data. TMP86FH47ADUG transmits no data and enters the halt condition.)
Note 3: *: Don’t care.
Note 4: When the above condition is not met, a password error occurs. If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning the error code.
Note 5: In the flash memory writing mode or RAM loader mode, the blank product receives the Intel Hex format data immediately
after receiving PCSA without receiving password strings. In this case, the subsequent processing is performed correctly
because the blank product ignores the data except the start mark (3AH “:”) as the Intel Hex format data, even if the external controller transmits the dummy password string. However, if the dummy password string contains “3AH”, it is detected
as the start mark erroneously. The microcontroller enters the halt mode. If this causes the problem, do not transmit the
dummy password strings.
Note 6: In the flash memory erasing mode, the external controller must not transmit the password string for the blank product.
Page 176
TMP86FH47ADUG
UART
RXD pin
F0H 12H F1H 07H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H
PNSA
08H
Password string
PCSA
Flash memory
F012H
08H
F107H
01H
F108H
02H
F109H
03H
F10AH
04H
F10BH
05H
Example
F10CH
06H
PNSA = F012H
PCSA = F107H
Password string = 01H,02H,03H,04H,05H
06H,07H,08H
F10DH
07H
F10EH
"08H" becomes
the umber of
Compare
passwords
8 bytes
08H
Figure 15-5 Password Comparison
15.10.1Password String
The password string transmitted from the external controller is compared with the specified data in the flash
memory. When the password string is not matched to the data in the flash memory, the device enters the halt
condition due to the password error.
15.10.2Handling of Password Error
If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition. In this case, reset the device to reactivate the
serial PROM mode.
15.10.3Password Management during Program Development
If a program is modified many times in the development stage, confusion may arise as to the password.
Therefore, it is recommended to use a fixed password in the program development stage.
Example :Specify PNSA to F000H, and the password string to 8 bytes from address F001H
(PCSA becomes F001H.)
Password Section code abs = 0F000H
DB
08H
: PNSA definition
DB
“CODE1234”
: Password string definition
Page 177
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.11 Product ID Code
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.11Product ID Code
The product ID code is the 13-byte data containing the start address and the end address of ROM. Table 15-17
shows the product ID code format.
Table 15-17 Product ID Code Format
Data
Description
In the Case of TMP86FH47ADUG
1st
Start Mark (3AH)
3AH
2nd
The number of transfer data (10 bytes from 3rd to 12th byte)
0AH
3rd
Address length (2 bytes)
02H
4th
Reserved data
1DH
5th
Reserved data
00H
6th
Reserved data
00H
7th
Reserved data
00H
8th
ROM block count
01H
9th
The first address of ROM (Upper byte)
C0H
10th
The first address of ROM (Lower byte)
00H
11th
The end address of ROM (Upper byte)
FFH
12th
The end address of ROM (Lower byte)
FFH
13th
Checksum of the transferred data (2’s compliment for the sum of
3rd through 12th bytes)
22H
15.12Flash Memory Status Code
The flash memory status code is the 7-byte data including the read protection status and the status of the data from
FFE0H to FFFFH. Table 15-18 shows the flash memory status code.
Table 15-18 Flash Memory Status Code
Data
Description
In the Case of
TMP86FH47ADUG
1st
Start mark
3AH
2nd
Transferred data count (3rd through 6th byte)
04H
3rd
Status code
00H to 03H
(See figure below)
4th
Reserved data
00H
5th
Reserved data
00H
6th
Reserved data
00H
3rd byte
00H
01H
02H
03H
Checksum of the transferred data (2’s compliment
for the sum of 3rd through 6th data)
7th
checksum
00H
FFH
FEH
FDH
Status Code 1
7
6
5
4
3
Page 178
2
1
0
RPENA
BLANK
(Initial Value: 0000 00**)
TMP86FH47ADUG
RPENA
Flash memory read protection status
0:
1:
Read protection is disabled.
Read protection is enabled.
BLANK
The status from FFE0H
to FFFFH.
0:
1:
All data is FFH in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH.
The value except FFH is included in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH.
Some operation commands are limited by the flash memory status code 1. If the read protection is enabled, flash
memory writing mode command and RAM loader mode command can not be executed. Erase all flash memory
before executing these command.
Flash Memory
Erasing Mode
RPENA
BLANK
Flash Memory
Writing Mode
RAM Loader
Mode
Flash memory
SUM
Output Mode
0
0
m
m
m
m
m
0
1
Pass
Pass
m
m
m
1
0
×
×
m
m
m
m
×
×
1
1
×
×
m
m
m
Pass
×
Pass
Product
ID Code Output
Mode
Flash Memory
Status Output
Mode
Sector
Erase
Chip
Erase
Read Protection Setting
Mode
×
m
Pass
Pass
Note: m:
The command can be executed.
Pass: The command can be executed with a password.
×:
The command can not be executed.
(After echoing the command back to the external controller, TMP86FH47ADUG stops UART communication and
enters
the halt condition.)
Page 179
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.13 Specifying the Erasure Area
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.13Specifying the Erasure Area
In the flash memory erasing mode, the erasure area of the flash memory is specified by n−2 byte data.
The start address of an erasure area is specified by ERASTA, and the end address is specified by ERAEND.
If ERASTA is equal to or smaller than ERAEND, the sector erase (erasure in 4 kbyte units) is executed. Executing
the sector erase while the read protection is enabled results in an infinite loop.
If ERASTA is larger than ERAEND, the chip erase (erasure of an entire flash memory area) is executed and the
read protection is disabled. Therefore, execute the chip erase (not sector erase) to disable the read protection.
Erasure Area Specification Data (n−2 byte data)
7
6
5
4
3
2
ERASTA
ERASTA
ERAEND
1
0
ERAEND
The start address of the
erasure area
0000:
0001:
0010:
0011:
0100:
0101:
0110:
0111:
1000:
1001:
1010:
1011:
1100:
1101:
1110:
1111:
from 0000H
from 1000H
from 2000H
from 3000H
from 4000H
from 5000H
from 6000H
from 7000H
from 8000H
from 9000H
from A000H
from B000H
from C000H
from D000H
from E000H
from F000H
The end address of the
erasure area
0000:
0001:
0010:
0011:
0100:
0101:
0110:
0111:
1000:
1001:
1010:
1011:
1100:
1101:
1110:
1111:
to 0FFFH
to 1FFFH
to 2FFFH
to 3FFFH
to 4FFFH
to 5FFFH
to 6FFFH
to 7FFFH
to 8FFFH
to 9FFFH
to AFFFH
to BFFFH
to CFFFH
to DFFFH
to EFFFH
to FFFFH
Note: When the sector erase is executed for the area containing no flash cell, TMP86FH47ADUG stops the UART communication and enters the halt condition.
15.14Port Input Control Register
In the serial PROM mode, the input level is fixed to the all ports except P03 and P02 ports with a hardware feature
to prevent overlap current to unused ports. (All port inputs and peripheral function inputs shared with the ports
become invalid.) Therefore, to access to the flash memory in the RAM loader mode without UART communication,
port inputs must be valid. To make port inputs valid, set the pin of the port input control register (SPCR) to “1”.
The SPCR register is not operated in the MCU mode.
Page 180
TMP86FH47ADUG
Port Input Control Register
SPCR
(0FEAH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PIN
PIN
Port input control in the serial PROM
mode
(Initial value: **** ***0)
0 : Invalid port inputs (The input level is fixed with a hardware feature.)
1 : Valid port inputs
R/W
Note 1: The SPCR register can be read or written only in the serial PROM mode. When the write instruction is executed to the
SPCR register in the MCU mode, the port input control can not be performed. When the read instruction is executed for
the SPCR register in the MCU mode, read data of bit7 to 1 are unstable.
Note 2: All I/O ports except P03 and P02 ports are controlled by the SPCR register.
Page 181
Page 182
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
Jump to the start address
of RAM program
Transmit UART data
(Checksum)
RAM write process
Flash memory
write process
OK
Receive UART data
(Intel Hex format)
Infinite loop
Receive UART data
(Intel Hex format)
OK
Transmit UART data
(Product ID code)
Infinite loop
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = FBH)
Read protection setting
OK
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
NG
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Transmit UART data
(Echo back the baud rate
modification data)
NG
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Receive UART data
Blank product check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = FAH)
Receive data = FAH
(Read protection
setting mode)
Non-blank product
Protection
Enable
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = C0H)
Receive data = C0H
(Product ID
code output mode)
Blank product check
Protection disabled
Read protection
check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 60H)
Receive data = 60H
(RAM loader
mode)
Blank Non-blank product
product
Protection
Enable
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 90H)
Receive data = 90H
(Flash memory sum
output mode)
Blank product check
Protection disabled
Read protection
check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 30H)
Receive data = 30H
(Flash memory
writing mode)
Receive UART data
Modify the baud rate
based on the receive data
Blank Non-blank product
product
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 5AH)
Yes
No
Adjust the baud rate
(Adjust the source
clock to 9600 bps)
Receive data =
5AH
Receive UART data
Setup
START
Transmit UART data
(Status of the read protection
and blank product)
Infinite loop
NG
Blank
product
Blank product check
Read protection check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = C3H)
Receive data = C3H
(Flash memory status
output mode)
Non-blank product
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
Disable read protection
Chip erase
(Erase on entire area)
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of
the erased area)
Sector erase (Block erase)
Upper 4 bits x 1000H
to
Lower 4 bits x 1000H
Protection disabled
Read protection
check
Upper 4 bits < Lower 4 bits
Infinite loop
NG
Upper 4 bits > Lower 4 bits
Receive data
Receive UART data
OK
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Blank
product
Blank product check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = F0H)
Receive data = F0H
(Flash memory
erasing mode)
Infinite loop
Protection
enabled
15.15 Flowchart
15. Serial PROM Mode
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.15Flowchart
TMP86FH47ADUG
15.16UART Timing
Table 15-19 UART Timing-1 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40°C)
Minimum Required Time
Parameter
Symbol
Clock Frequency (fc)
At fc = 2 MHz
At fc = 16 MHz
Time from matching data reception to the echo back
CMeb1
Approx. 930
465 µs
58.1 µs
Time from baud rate modification data reception to the echo back
CMeb2
Approx. 980
490 µs
61.3 µs
Time from operation command reception to the echo back
CMeb3
Approx. 800
400 µs
50 µs
Checksum calculation time
CKsm
Approx. 7864500
3.93 s
491.5 µs
Erasure time of an entire flash memory
CEall
-
30 ms
30 ms
Erasure time for a sector of a flash memory (in 4-kbyte units)
CEsec
-
15 ms
15 ms
Table 15-20 UART Timing-2 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40°C)
Minimum Required Time
Parameter
Symbol
Clock Frequency (fc)
At fc = 2 MHz
At fc = 16 MHz
Time from the reset release to the acceptance of start bit of RXD pin
RXsup
2100
1.05 ms
131.3 ms
Matching data transmission interval
CMtr1
28500
14.2 ms
1.78 ms
Time from the echo back of matching data to the acceptance of baud rate
modification data
CMtr2
380
190 µs
23.8 µs
Time from the echo back of baud rate modification data to the acceptance
of an operation command
CMtr3
650
325 µs
40.6 µs
Time from the echo back of operation command to the acceptance of
password count storage addresses (Upper byte)
CMtr4
800
400 µs
50 µs
CMtr3
CMtr2
RXsup
CMtr4
RESET pin
(5AH)
(30H)
(28H)
RXD pin
(5AH)
(30H)
(28H)
TXD pin
CMeb1
(5AH)
CMeb2
(5AH)
RXD pin
TXD pin
CMtr1
Page 183
CMeb3
(5AH)
15. Serial PROM Mode
15.16 UART Timing
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 184
TMP86FH47ADUG
16. Input/Output Circuitry
16.1 Control Pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86FH47ADUG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin
I/O
Input/Output Circuitry
Remarks
Osc. enable
fc
VDD
XIN
XOUT
Resonator connecting pins
(high-frequency)
Rf = 1.2 MΩ (typ.)
VDD
Rf
Input
Output
RO
RO = 1.5 kΩ (typ.)
XIN
XOUT
XTEN
Osc. enable
XTIN
XTOUT
Input
Output
fs
VDD
Resonator connecting pins
(low-frequency)
Rf = 6 MΩ (typ.)
VDD
Rf
RO
RO = 220 kΩ (typ.)
XTIN
XTOUT
RESET
I/O
Hysteresis input
Pull-up resistor
RIN = 220 kΩ (typ.)
R = 1 kΩ (typ.)
VDD
TEST
Input
Without Pull-down resistor
R = 1 kΩ (typ.)
Fix the TEST pin at low-level
R
Note: The TEST pin of the TMP86FH47ADUG does not have a pull-down resistor. Fix the TEST pin at low-level.
Page 185
16. Input/Output Circuitry
16.2 Input/Output Ports
TMP86FH47ADUG
16.2 Input/Output Ports
Port
I/O
Input/Output Circuitry
P0
I/O
Remarks
Sink open drain output
High current output
Hysteresis input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
P1
I/O
Tri-state I/O
Hysteresis input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
P2
I/O
Sink open drain output
High current output
Hysteresis input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
P3
Tri-state I/O
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
I/O
P4
I/O
Page 186
Tri-state I/O
High current output (Nch)
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
TMP86FH47ADUG
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant.
Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down
or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when
designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Ratings
Unit
V
Supply voltage
VDD
-0.3 to 6.5
Input voltage
VIN
-0.3 to VDD + 0.3
V
VOUT1
-0.3 to VDD + 0.3
V
Output voltage
Output current (Per 1 pin)
Output current (Total)
IOUT1
P1, P3, P4 ports
-1.8
IOUT2
P1, P3 ports
3.2
IOUT3
P0, P2, P4 ports
30
Σ IOUT1
P1, P3 ports
60
Σ IOUT2
P0, P2, P4 ports
80
Power dissipation [Topr = 85 °C]
PD
250
Soldering temperature (time)
Tsld
260 (10 s)
Storage temperature
Tstg
-55 to 125
Operating temperature
Topr
-40 to 85
Page 187
mA
mW
°C
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
TMP86FH47ADUG
17.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
The recommended operating conditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that
the device will operate as specified. If the device is used under operating conditions other than the recommended
operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified AC/DC values etc.), malfunction may
occur. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the recommended operating conditions
for the device are always adhered to.
17.2.1 Serial PROM mode
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40 °C)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Condition
VDD
Supply voltage
VIH1
Input high voltage
Input low voltage
Clock frequency
NORMAL1, 2 modes
Except hysteresis input
VIH2
Hysteresis input
VIL1
Except hysteresis input
VIL2
Hysteresis input
fc
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
XIN, XOUT
Min
Max
4.5
5.5
VDD × 0.70
Unit
VDD
VDD × 0.75
V
VDD × 0.30
0
VDD × 0.25
2.0
16.0
MHz
17.2.2 MCU mode (Except Flash Programming or erasing)
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Supply voltage
(Condition 1)
VDD
Ratings
fc = 16 MHz
NORMAL1, 2 modes
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
fc = 8 MHz
NORMAL1, 2 modes
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
fs = 32.768 KHz
SLOW1, 2 modes
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
Min
Max
4.5
5.5
3.0
V
STOP mode
Supply voltage
(Condition 2)
(Note1)
Unit
fc = 8 MHz
NORMAL1, 2 modes
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
fs = 32.768 KHz
SLOW1, 2 modes
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
2.7
3.0
STOP mode
Input high level
VIH1
Except hysteresis input
VIH2
Hysteresis input
VDD < 4.5 V
VIH3
Input low level
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VIL1
Except hysteresis input
VIL2
Hysteresis input
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VDD × 0.70
VDD × 0.75
VDD × 0.90
VDD × 0.30
0
VDD = 2.7 to 3.0V (Note1)
fc
XIN, XOUT
1.0
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
Clock frequency
fs
Note 1:
VDD = 3.0 to 5.5V
XTIN, XTOUT
VDD = 2.7 to 3.0V (Note1)
VDD = 3.0 to 5.5V
VDD × 0.25
8.0
MHz
16.0
30.0
34.0
When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20°C to 85°C.
Page 188
V
VDD × 0.10
VDD < 4.5 V
VIL3
VDD
kHz
TMP86FH47ADUG
17.2.3 MCU mode (Flash Programming or erasing)
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40°C)
Parameter
Supply voltage
Input high level
Input low level
Clock frequency
Symbol
Pins
VDD
VIH1
Except hysteresis input
VIH2
Hysteresis input
VIL1
Except hysteresis input
VIL2
Hysteresis input
fc
Ratings
NORMAL1, 2 modes
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
XIN, XOUT
Min
Max
4.5
5.5
VDD × 0.70
VDD × 0.75
0
1.0
Page 189
VDD
Unit
V
VDD × 0.30
VDD × 0.25
16.0
MHz
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
TMP86FH47ADUG
17.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 °C)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
–
0.9
–
V
–
–
±2
µA
100
220
450
kΩ
Hysteresis voltage
VHS
Hysteresis input
IIN1
TEST
Input current
IIN2
Sink open drain, tri–state port
IIN3
RESET, STOP
RIN2
RESET pull–up
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V
ILO1
Sink open drain port
VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V
–
–
2
ILO2
Tri–state port
VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V
–
–
±2
Output high voltage
VOH
Tri–state port
VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA
4.1
–
–
Output low voltage
VOL
Except XOUT, P3, P5
VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA
–
–
0.4
Output low curren
IOL
High current port
(P3, P5 Port)
VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V
–
20
–
When a program
operates on flash
memory (Note5,6)
–
12.6
18
When a program
operates on RAM
(FLSSTB<FSTB>=0)
–
6.5
9
–
4.5
6.5
When a program
operates on flash
memory (Note5,6)
–
20.0
50.0
When a program
operates on RAM
(FLSSTB<FSTB>=0)
–
14.0
28.0
When a program
operates on RAM
(FLSSTB<FSTB>=1)
–
9.0
–
Supply current in
SLEEP1 mode
–
5.0
15.0
Supply current in
SLEEP0 mode
–
4.0
13.0
–
0.5
10
VDD = 5.5 V
–
10
–
VDD = 3.0 V
–
2
–
Input resistance
Output leakage current
Supply current in
NORMAL1, 2 modes
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
VDD = 5.5 V
VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Supply current in IDLE
0, 1, 2 modes
Supply current in
SLOW1 mode
IDD
VDD = 3.0 V
VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V
fs = 32.768 kHz
VDD = 5.5 V
Supply current in
STOP mode
Peak current for
SLOW1 mode
(Note5,6)
VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
IDDP-P
µA
V
mA
mA
µA
mA
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25°C and VDD = 5 V.
Note 2: Input current IIN1: The current through pull-down resistor is not included.
Note 3: IDD does not include IREF.
Note 4: The supply currents of SLOW2 and SLEEP2 modes are equivalent to those of IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 modes.
Note 5: When a program is executing in the flash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory
operates in an intermittent manner, causing peak currents in the operation current, as shown in Figure 17-1.
In this case, the supply current IDD (in NORMAL1, NORMAL2 and SLOW1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average
peak current and MCU current.
Note 6: When designing the power supply, make sure that peak currents can be supplied. In SLOW1 mode, the difference
between the peak current and the average current becomes large.
Page 190
TMP86FH47ADUG
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs)
n
Program coutner (PC)
n+1
n+2
n+3
Momentary flash current
I DDP-P
[mA]
Max. current
Typ. current
Sum of average
momentary flash current
and MCU current
MCU current
Figure 17-1 Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
Page 191
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
TMP86FH47ADUG
17.4 AD Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85 °C)
Paramete
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Analog reference voltage
VAREF
AVDD - 1.0
–
AVDD
Power supply voltage of analog control
circuit
AVDD
VDD
AVSS
VSS
V
∆ VAREF
3.5
–
–
Analog input voltage
VAIN
VSS
–
VAREF
Power supply current of analog reference voltage
IREF
–
0.6
1.0
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
Analog reference voltage range (Note 4)
VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 5.5 V
VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V
Non linearity error
VDD = AVDD = 5.0 V,
Zero point error
VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V
Full scale error
VAREF = 5.0 V
Total error
Unit
mA
LSB
(VSS = 0 V, 3.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Analog reference voltage
VAREF
AVDD - 1.0
–
AVDD
Power supply voltage of analog control
circuit
AVDD
VDD
AVSS
VSS
V
∆ VAREF
2.5
–
–
Analog input voltage
VAIN
VSS
–
VAREF
Power supply current of analog reference voltage
IREF
–
0.5
0.8
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
Analog reference voltage range (Note 4)
VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 4.5 V
VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V
Non linearity error
VDD = AVDD = 3.0 V
Zero point error
VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V
Full scale error
VAREF = 3.0 V
Total error
Unit
mA
LSB
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V, Topr = -20 to 85°C) (Note6)
Parameter
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Analog reference voltage
VAREF
AVDD - 0.5
–
AVDD
Power supply voltage of analog control
circuit
AVDD
VDD
AVSS
VSS
V
∆ VAREF
2.5
–
–
Analog input voltage
VAIN
VSS
–
VAREF
Power supply current of analog reference voltage
IREF
–
0.3
0.5
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
Analog reference voltage range (Note 4)
VDD = AVDD = VAREF =2.7 V
VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V
Non linearity error
Zero point error
Full scale error
VDD = AVDD = 2.7 V
VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V
VAREF = 2.7 V
Total error
Unit
mA
LSB
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quanitization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line.
Note 2: Conversion time is defferent in recommended value by power supply voltage.
Note 3: The voltage to be input on the AIN input pin must not exceed the range between VAREF and VSS. If a voltage outside this
range is input, conversion values will become unstable and conversion values of other channels will also be affected.
Note 4: Analog reference voltage range: ∆VAREF = VAREF - VSS
Note 5: When AD converter is not used, fix the AVDD and VAREF pin on the VDD level.
Page 192
TMP86FH47ADUG
Note 6: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20°C to 85°C.
Page 193
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.6 Flash Characteristics
TMP86FH47ADUG
17.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
0.25
–
4
117.6
–
133.3
For external clock operation (XIN input)
fc = 16 MHz
–
31.25
–
ns
For external clock operation (XTIN input)
fs = 32.768 kHz
–
15.26
–
µs
NORMAL1, 2 modes
Machine cycle time
tcy
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
µs
SLOW1, 2 modes
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
High-level clock pulse width
tWCH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWCL
High-level clock pulse width
tWSH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWSL
Unit
(VSS = 0 V, 3.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C) (Note1)
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V, Topr = -20 to 85°C) (Note1)
Paramete
Symbol
Condition
NORMAL1, 2 modes
tcy
Machine cycle time
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
SLOW1, 2 modes
tWCH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWCL
High-level clock pulse width
tWSH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWSL
Typ.
Max
0.5
–
4
Unit
µs
117.6
–
133.3
For external clock operation (XIN input)
fc = 8 MHz
–
62.5
–
ns
For external clock operation (XTIN input)
fs = 32.768 kHz
–
15.26
–
µs
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
High-level clock pulse width
Min
Note 1: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20°C to 85°C.
17.6 Flash Characteristics
17.6.1 Write Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V)
Paramete
Number of guaranteed writes to flash memory
Condition
VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40°C
Page 194
Min
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–
–
100
Times
TMP86FH47ADUG
17.7 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN
XOUT
XTIN
C2
C1
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
XTOUT
C1
C2
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are
greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be
mounted.
Note 2: When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend
electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Note 3: The product numbers and specifications of the resonators by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. are subject to change. For
up-to-date information, please refer to the following URL:
http://www.murata.com
17.8 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown
below.
1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath
Solder bath temperature = 230 °C
Dipping time = 5 seconds
Number of times = once
R-type flux used
2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath
Solder bath temperature = 245 °C
Dipping time = 5 seconds
Number of times = once
R-type flux used
Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows:
Solderability rate until forming ≥ 95 %
- When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 195
17. Electrical Characteristics
17.8 Handling Precaution
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 196
TMP86FH47ADUG
18. Package Dimension
P-LQFP48-0707-0.50D
Unit: mm
Page 197
18. Package Dimension
TMP86FH47ADUG
Page 198
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit
microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software
development.
These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and
can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates.
The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer
systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also
be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using.
Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS
production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology.
We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas.
We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.